在《长部》当中。显示巴利原文
Dīghanikāye
《大品复注》。显示巴利原文
Mahāvaggaṭīkā
1. 《大本经》的注释。显示巴利原文
1. Mahāpadānasuttavaṇṇanā
关于“宿住相应”这一内容的注释。显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsapaṭisaṃyuttakathāvaṇṇanā
1 那些自然生长的迦利罗树,枝叶、小枝繁密交错,如同帐幕般覆盖,那地方便名为「迦利罗圆亭」。「门」是指门的附近。为了显示因树在门旁而立,其他地方也沿用此名,故说“如同”等。那么,世尊当时为何不住大香殿,而住在迦利罗小屋中呢?这是为了表明那间小屋也是佛陀世尊居住的香殿,所以说“在祇园内”等。「多罗叶屋」即是用天木(雪松)建造的房屋。「常食之后」是指比丘们常食时间之后,也就是正午(日正中天)以后。「从团食返回者」是指已离开团食、用过饭的人。因此才说“食事”等内容。显示巴利原文
1. Yathājātānaṃ karerirukkhānaṃ ghanapattasākhāviṭapehi maṇḍapasaṅkhepehi sañchanno padeso ‘‘karerimaṇḍapo’’ti adhippeto. Dvāreti dvārasamīpe. Dvāre ṭhitarukkhavasena aññatthāpi samaññā atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ pana bhagavā mahāgandhakuṭiyaṃ avasitvā tadā karerikuṭikāyaṃ vihāsīti? Sāpi buddhassa bhagavato vasanagandhakuṭi evāti dassento ‘‘antojetavane’’tiādimāha. Salaḷāgāranti devadārurukkhehi katagehaṃ. Pakatibhattassa pacchatoti bhikkhūnaṃ pākatikabhattakālato pacchā, ṭhitamajjhanhikato uparīti attho. Piṇḍapātato paṭikkantānanti piṇḍapātabhojanato apetānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bhattakicca’’ntiādi.
圆形、依亭子样式所建的坐具堂,被称为「圆亭」,故说「在坐具堂中」。在「宿住相应」中,「宿」字指过去范围,「住」字是业作名词。而除了蕴之外,并没有另外的所住法,并且蕴只是依相续而转起,所以说「以过去所住蕴的相续,称为宿住」。「结合」是指以所缘的方式结合。「说示了」即已讲说。因与法相关联,不离法,故称为「有法的」;因此说「法相应的」。显示巴利原文
Maṇḍalasaṇṭhānā māḷasaṅkhepena katā nisīdanasālā ‘‘maṇḍalamāḷa’’nti adhippetāti āha ‘‘nisīdanasālāyā’’ti. Pubbenivāsapaṭisaṃyuttāti ettha pubba-saddo atītavisayo, nivāsa-saddo kammasādhano, khandhavinimutto ca nivasitadhammo natthi, khandhā ca santānavaseneva pavattantīti āha ‘‘pubbenivutthakkhandhasantānasaṅkhātena pubbenivāsenā’’ti. Yojetvāti visayabhāvena yojetvā. Pavattitāti kathitā. Dhammūpasaṃhitattā dhammato anapetāti dhammī. Tenāha ‘‘dhammasaṃyuttā’’ti.
「生起了」是抽出的词句,它与“已生起的、已出生的”相关联。然而,这个“生起”的方式在经文中只是简略显示,为了详细显示,便开始说“啊,真是稀有”等。其中,对于“哪些人随念,哪些人不随念”这两句,首先说明的是那些具戏论者,而非其他,正是通过补特伽罗的差别、时间的划分、随念的方式以及譬喻来解说,故说“外道们随念……”等。「达到最高业说者」是指在业论上达到顶点的人,他们安住于“业是自己所有”的智见,如同那些苦行者和游方者,认为“有业,有业的果报”。他们只随念四十劫,因为世尊在《梵网经》等经中作此限定而说。他们不能随念超过四十劫,这既是因为有那样的教说,也因为他们被恶见所覆蔽,智慧本身相当羸弱的缘故。显示巴利原文
Udapādīti paduddhāro, tassa uppannā jātāti iminā sambandho. Taṃ panassā uppannākāraṃ pāḷiyaṃ saṅkhepatova dassitaṃ, vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘aho acchariya’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ke anussaranti, ke nānussarantīti padadvaye paṭhamaṃyeva sappapañcanaṃ, na itaranti tadeva puggalabhedato, kālavibhāgato, anussaraṇākārato, opammato niddisantena ‘‘titthiyā anussarantī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aggappattakammavādinoti sikhāppattakammavādino ‘‘atthi kammaṃ atthi kammavipāko’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.234) evaṃ kammassakatāñāṇe ṭhitā tāpasaparibbājakā. Cattālīsaṃyeva kappe anussarantīti brahmajālādīsu (dī. ni. 1.33) bhagavatā tathā paricchijja vuttattā. Tato paraṃ na anussarantīti tathāvacanañca diṭṭhigatopaṭṭhakassa tesaṃ ñāṇassa paridubbalabhāvato.
「声闻」指大弟子,他们于十万劫前已发愿。普通声闻随念的劫数则少于彼。上首弟子与独觉佛的福德智慧发愿,以及声闻菩提、辟支菩提波罗蜜的圆满积聚,依时间顺次说为“百千劫加一劫,以及两阿僧祇劫”,故云“两位上首弟子……乃至十万劫”等。若圣者们神通智慧的程度由积聚菩提资粮的时间所限定,以此推究,佛陀的神通智慧亦应有界限;为避此难,故说:“然而,诸佛并无‘仅此而已’的界限,他们欲随念多少,便能随念多少”,如经云:“所知有多少,彼智慧即有多少”(《大义释》156;《小义释》85;《无碍解道》3,5)。因正如佛陀的一切知智,诸佛的种种神通智慧在各自领域内亦无固定范围;故其欲知何事,即能知何事。又可说:纵使时间上似有范围,然大菩提资粮中悲心、方便善巧、摄受众生的力量过于殊胜,此乃般若波罗蜜威力的展现,其本身已无界限,更何况由之所引生的这些神通智慧呢?显示巴利原文
Sāvakāti mahāsāvakā tesañhi kappasatasahassaṃ pubbābhinīhāro. Pakatisāvakā pana tato ūnakameva anussaranti. Yasmā ‘‘kappānaṃ lakkhādhikaṃ ekaṃ, dve ca asaṅkhyeyyānī’’ti kālavasena evaṃ parimāṇo yathākkamaṃ aggasāvakapaccekabuddhānaṃ puññañāṇābhinīhāro, sāvakabodhipaccekabodhipāramitāsambharaṇañca, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dve aggasāvakā…pe… kappasatasahassañcā’’ti. Yadi bodhisambhārasambharaṇakālaparicchinno tesaṃ tesaṃ ariyānaṃ abhiññāñāṇavibhavo, evaṃ sante buddhānampissa saparicchedatā āpannāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘buddhānaṃ pana ettakanti paricchedo natthi, yāvatakaṃ ākaṅkhanti, tāvatakaṃ anussarantī’’ti ‘‘yāvatakaṃ neyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇa’’nti (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3, 5) vacanato. Sabbaññutaññāṇassa viya hi buddhānaṃ abhiññāñāṇānampi savisaye paricchedo nāma natthi, tasmā yaṃ yaṃ ñātuṃ icchanti, te taṃ taṃ jānanti eva. Atha vā satipi kālaparicchede karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahādinā sātisayattā mahābodhisambhārānaṃ paññāpāramitāya pavattiānubhāvassa paricchedo nāma natthi, kuto tannimittakānaṃ abhiññāñāṇānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhānaṃ…pe… natthī’’ti.
「蕴的次第」指依缘次第转起的诸蕴的顺序。「蕴的转起」指受等诸蕴的转起。对他们而言,把握领受等行相更为殊胜,故当随念各处渐次前进时,于有想有中未得无想有,因此说“看不见”——如落网之鸟,或如鱼,此是比喻的用意。「如钝」指如迟钝者。「如跛」指如依靠凳子才能行走者。「执取见」即执取无因生论的见解。「杖端行」指不能脱离蕴的次第,如同依靠杖端引导而行。显示巴利原文
Khandhapaṭipāṭiyāti yathāpaccayaṃ anupubbapavattamānānaṃ khandhānaṃ anupubbiyā. Khandhappavattinti vedanādikkhandhappavattiṃ. Tesañhi anubhavanādiākāraggahaṇamassa sātisayaṃ, taṃ saññābhave tattha tattha anussaraṇavasena gahetvā gacchantā ekavokārabhave alabhantā ‘‘na passantī’’ti vuttā, jāle patitā viya sakuṇā, macchā viya cāti adhippāyo. Kuṇṭhā viyāti dandhā viya. Paṅguḷā viyāti pīṭhasappino viya. Diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhantīti adhiccasamuppannikadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhanti. Yaṭṭhikoṭihetukaṃ gamanaṃ yaṭṭhikoṭigamanaṃ khandhapaṭipāṭiyā amuñcanato.
「即使如此」意为:佛陀的声闻虽亦不见无想有中的蕴转起,然他们却能越过无想有而更远随念。「于轮转中……」等是显示其随念方式。「安立于佛陀所开示的理趣」指安立于正自觉者所说之法网中:“凡五百劫中唯有色转起,无无色转起,彼即无想有。”如是,他们虽不见中间的死与结生,却能更往前随念,如尊者索毗陀(《长老偈注》1.2.164)。据说,彼于宿住随念得自在后,顺次随念己之投生处,直至见己于无想有中无心结生;此后五百劫中,不见死与结生,最后见死,思择“此为何”,依理趣得出结论:“此应为无想有。”世尊即以此因缘,立彼为宿住随念者之首。「观察死与结生之后」显示其智透过死与结生而转移,由此显示他们无法完全不触及而越过一切有。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ santepīti kāmaṃ buddhasāvakāpi asaññabhave khandhappavattiṃ na passanti, evaṃ santepi te buddhasāvakā asaññabhavaṃ laṅghitvā parato anussaranti. ‘‘Vaṭṭe’’tiādi tathā tesaṃ anussaraṇākāradassanaṃ. Buddhehi dinnanaye ṭhatvāti ‘‘yattha pañcakappasatāni rūpappavattiyeva, na arūpappavatti, so asaññabhavo’’ti evaṃ sammāsambuddhehi desitāyaṃ dhammanettiyaṃ ṭhatvā. Evañhi antarā cutipaṭisandhiyo apassantā parato anussaranti seyyathāpi āyasmā sobhitoti (theragā. aṭṭha. 1.2.164 sobhitattheragāthāvaṇṇanā). So kira pubbenivāse ciṇṇavasī hutvā anupaṭipāṭiyā attano nibbattaṭṭhānaṃ anussaranto yāva asaññabhave attano acittakapaṭisandhi tāva addasa, tato paraṃ pañcakappasataparimāṇe kāle cutipaṭisandhiyo adisvā avasāne cutiṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ nāmeta’’nti āvajjayamāno nayavasena ‘‘asaññabhavo bhavissatī’’ti niṭṭhaṃ agamāsi. Atha naṃ bhagavā taṃ kāraṇaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantānaṃ aggaṭṭhāne ṭhapesi. ‘‘Cutipaṭisandhiṃ oloketvā’’ti idaṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena tesaṃ ñāṇassa saṅkamanadassanaṃ, tena sabbaso bhave anāmasitvā gantuṃ na sakkontīti dasseti.
“他们见到同样的那些”,意思是:如同秋天正午时分,眼力正常的人在一座四层高的房屋内,对眼前的色所缘能看得极为清楚——这是世间公认的道理。然而,对于更加微细、有障碍等类别的色所缘,此人或许无法缘取;可是,诸佛对于任何想要了知的对象,却没有不能缘取的情况。因为所知之障已彻底断除,在智慧之光的照耀下,他们想知的对象,就像放在掌中的芒果一样极其明显、极其清晰。因此说:“然而佛陀们,对于自己或他人所见、所作、所闻的事物,犹如日轮的光芒……”等等。显示巴利原文
Taṃ tadeva passantīti yathā nāma saradasamaye ṭhitamajjhanhikavelāya caturatanike gehe cakkhumato purisassa rūpagataṃ supākaṭameva hotīti lokasiddhametaṃ, siyā pana tassa sukhumataratirohitādibhedassa rūpagatassa agocaratā. Na tveva buddhānaṃ ñātuṃ icchitassa ñeyyassa agocaratā, atha kho taṃ ñāṇālokena obhāsitaṃ hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya supākaṭaṃ suvibhūtameva hoti tathā ñeyyāvaraṇassa suppahīnattā. Tenāha ‘‘buddhā pana attanā vā parehi vā diṭṭhakatasutaṃ, sūriyamaṇḍalobhāsasadisa’’nti ca ādi.
“同样的,声闻与独觉佛也是如此。”此处用“同样的”一词,承接了“他们只忆念自己所见、所作、所闻之事”这个意思,由此表明他们的随念是部分性的,而非无所不包。显示巴利原文
Tathā sāvakā ca paccekabuddhā cāti. Ettha tathā-saddena ‘‘attanā diṭṭhakatasutameva anussarantī’’ti idaṃ upasaṃharati, tena sappadesameva nesaṃ anussaraṇaṃ, na nippadesanti nidasseti.
“犹如萤火虫的光”,这是形容声闻智慧的作用力极其微弱。这里的“声闻”:普通声闻的智慧光,如同普通的灯盏;大声闻的,则如同大灯盏。(《长老偈注》中关于鹏耆舍长老偈颂的注释有详细说明。)因此《清净道论》中说“犹如火炬的光芒”。“犹如晨星的光芒”,此星光特别明亮,因此得名;又或因为它能滋养药草而被称为晨星,指的正是那颗星宿的光芒。“犹如秋日太阳的光芒”,则是因为它能彻底驱散黑暗。在取境的时候,因不明利的因所导致的动摇状态,称为“飘荡”;因迟钝的因而不能通达境,称为“障碍”。“只系于转向”,意思是只依赖转向,在刚一转向的当下就能通达所要了知的对象。其余两句,也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Khajjopanakaobhāsasadisaṃ ñāṇassa ativiya appānubhāvatāya. Sāvakānanti ettha pakatisāvakānaṃ pākatikapadīpobhāsasadisaṃ. Mahāsāvakānaṃ (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.21 vaṅgīsettharagāthāvaṇṇanāya vitthāro) mahāpadīpobhāsasadisaṃ. Tenāha visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.402) ‘‘ukkāpabhāsadisa’’nti. Osadhitārakobhāsasadisanti ussannā pabhā etāya dhīyati, osadhīnaṃ vā anubalappadāyakattā ‘‘osadhī’’ti evaṃ laddhanāmāya tārakāya pabhāsadisaṃ. Saradasūriyamaṇḍalobhāsasadisaṃ sabbaso andhakāravidhamanato. Apaṭubhāvahetuko visayaggahaṇe cañcalabhāvo khalitaṃ, kuṇṭhibhāvahetuko visayassa anabhisamayo paṭighāto.Āvajjanapaṭibaddhamevāti āvajjanamattādhīnaṃ, āvajjitamatte eva yathicchitassa paṭivijjhanakanti attho. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
为显示世尊的智慧无论在微细境或粗重境中,皆同样无滞无碍地运转,故以「弱叶器皿」等两个譬喻来说明。因为世尊是法身,这些功德乃是「唯缘于世尊而生起的」。所谓「所有那些」,即指上述一切与宿住相关的叙述。此处叙述外道与声闻们的宿住随念,意在对比显示世尊宿住随念之低劣,由此特别彰显世尊的伟大。「简略而言」即是概括之意。那些比丘将各自智慧范围内所呈现的宿住随念智的种种差别,依所说加以概括,而说:“itipi”。因其具有多种形态,故以重复的方式表达;其中‘pi’字为合集义,‘iti’字表示方式,正如在「诸比丘,愚者如是具有怖畏」等经文中那样。为说明此义,注释说:“evampi”(如是)。显示巴利原文
Asaṅgaappaṭihataṃ pavattamānaṃ bhagavato ñāṇaṃ lahutarepi visaye, garutare ca ekasadisamevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘dubbalapattapuṭe’’tiādinā upamādvayaṃ vuttaṃ. Dhammakāyattā bhagavato guṇaṃ ārabbha pavattā ‘‘bhagavantaṃyeva ārabbha uppannā’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ sabbampīti taṃ yathāvuttaṃ sabbampi pubbenivāsapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ kathaṃ. Titthiyānaṃ, sāvakānañca pubbenivāsānussaraṇaṃ bhagavato pubbenivāsānussaraṇassa hīnudāharaṇadassanavasenettha kathitaṃ. Evañhi bhagavato mahantabhāvo visesato pakāsito hotīti. Saṅkhepatoti samāsato. Yattakopi pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇassa pavattibhedo attano ñāṇassa visayabhūto, taṃ sabbaṃ tadā yathākathitaṃ te bhikkhū saṅkhipitvā ‘‘itipī’’ti āhaṃsu. Tassa ca anekākāratāya āmeḍitavacanaṃ, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, ‘‘iti kho bhikkhave sappaṭibhayo bālo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.124; a. ni. 3.1) viya ākārattho iti-saddoti dassento ‘‘evampī’’ti tadatthamāha.
2-3 「已说的」在此处的意思是:于本文句中,与彼文句共通的部分,即称为「已说的」;并非指不共通的、新词的解释,因为那种解释更为殊胜。为表明此义,注释说「这就是差别」等。「听到了」是就听闻作用的完成而说的,因为把握了音声便能了达其义。而在经文中,则直接说「觉了这个略说法后」。句子的关联是:这些比丘赞叹我的功德,如何赞叹的呢?是就我的宿住智而赞叹。「成就」指作用的达成,即所应作之事已经完成。「No」是疑问词,与「nu」同义,所以注释说「你们想要吗」。「那般」指世尊。「彼世尊」中的‘yaṃ’是代指行为的词,即「开示法语」;此开示法语的举动被代指,便是「此之」一词的所指,因此注释说「此开示法语之举」。出于敬意,重复了两次。显示巴利原文
2-3.Vuttamevāti ettha ca idha pāṭhe yaṃ vattabbaṃ tena pāṭhena sādhāraṇaṃ, taṃ vuttamevāti adhippetaṃ, na asādhāraṇaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanāya adhikatattāti taṃ dassento ‘‘ayameva hi viseso’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Assosī’’ti idaṃ savanakiccanipphattiyā vuttaṃ saddaggahaṇamukhena tadatthāvabodhassa siddhattā. Tattha pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘imaṃ saṃkhiyadhammaṃ viditvā’’ icceva (dī. ni. 1.2) vuttaṃ. Ime bhikkhū mama guṇe thomenti, kathaṃ? Mama pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ ārabbhāti yojanā. Nipphattinti kiccanipphattiṃ, tena kātabbakiccasiddhanti attho. Noti pucchāvācī nu-iti iminā samānattho nipātoti vuttaṃ ‘‘iccheyyātha nū’’ti. Nanti bhagavantaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ bhagavā’’ti ettha yaṃ-saddena kiriyāparāmasanabhūtena ‘‘dhammiṃ kathaṃ katheyyā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Dhammikathākaraṇaṃ parāmaṭṭhaṃ ‘‘etassā’’ti padassa atthoti āha ‘‘etassa dhammikathākaraṇassā’’ti, ādaravasena pana taṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ.
4 「请听」中的‘iti’字表起始,或表方式,由此含摄了「请留意」一语。专心侧耳而听,即善听,这是其义。那些人的轮回流转之路已被截断、止息,故称为「断轮者」,此包括正自觉者及其他漏尽者。此处特指正自觉者,因为他们随念的范围为他人所不及。所以注释说:「为他人所不共」。‘yaṃ’字作主格时,表行为的主体;作对格时,表询问动作的对象。‘taṃ’则为对格,因为「问」这一动词具有双宾语的性质。‘yaṃ’表示‘由何原因’,即是此义,因此注释说「在具格中出现」。此处应视为处格,正如‘yaṃ’字不仅见于主格与对格,也见于具格,同样应视作处格。「十千世界界」指作为诞生田的一万轮围世界。佛陀出现时,有众多稀有瑞相伴随,故称「轰然而起」。显示巴利原文
4.Suṇāthāti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, etena ‘‘manasi karothā’’ti padaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sotāvadhānaṃ sotassa odahanaṃ, sussūsāti attho. Chinnaṃ upacchinnaṃ vaṭumaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭaṃ etesanti chinnavaṭumakā, sammāsambuddhā, aññe ca khīṇāsavā, idha pana sammāsambuddhā adhippetā. Tesañhi sabbaso anussaraṇaṃ itaresaṃ avisayo. Tenāha ‘‘aññesaṃ asādhāraṇa’’nti. Paccattavacane dissati yaṃ-saddo kammatthadīpanato. Upayogavacane dissati yaṃ-saddo pucchanakiriyāya kammatthadīpanato. Tanti ca upayogavacanameva pucchati-saddassa dvikammakabhāvato. Yanti yena kāraṇenāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘karaṇavacane dissatī’’ti. Bhummeti daṭṭhabboti yathā yaṃ-saddo na kevalaṃ paccattaupayogesu eva, atha kho karaṇepi dissati, evaṃ idha bhummeti daṭṭhabbo. Dasasahassilokadhātunti jātikkhettabhūtaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷaṃ. Unnādento uppajji anekacchariyapātubhāvapaṭimaṇḍitattā buddhuppādassa.
所谓“劫的吉祥”,是指在此劫中,由于众生的功德显现殊胜,而佛陀出世又是最为殊胜的功德显现,因此,以佛陀出世众多而称为“吉祥劫”,故说“以有五佛出世庄严而名为庄严劫”。同样,以其具有真实核心的功德,故称为“核心劫”。说明了“赞颂此劫时如此说”之后,为了显示此劫值得这样赞颂,与其他劫不同,便说“自从以来”等。其中,“自从以来”是指从(成佛之)愿发起开始。这位菩萨具足了人身等八个条件,发起了成佛的愿。因为轮回没有开端,在这位世尊发愿之前,已有不可计数的正自觉者出世;为了排除他们出世所在的劫,才说“在这段期间”。虽然这位世尊是在燃灯佛出世时发愿,但燃灯佛的诞生是在他发愿之前,所以说“我们的(amhākaṃ)……诞生了”。显示巴利原文
Kālassa bhaddatā nāma tattha sattānaṃ guṇavibhūtiyā, buddhuppādaparamā ca guṇavibhūtīti tabbahulatā yassa kappassa bhaddatāti āha ‘‘pañcabuddhuppādapaṭimaṇḍitattā sundarakappe’’ti, tathā sārabhūtaguṇavasena ‘‘sārakappe’’ti . ‘‘Imaṃ kappaṃ thomento evamāhā’’ti vatvā imassa kappassa tathā thometabbatā anaññasādhāraṇāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yato paṭṭhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yato paṭṭhāyāti yato pabhuti abhinīhāro katoti manussattādiaṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato abhinīhāro pavattito. Saṃsārassa anādibhāvato imassa bhagavato abhinīhārato puretaraṃ uppannā sammāsambuddhā anantā aparimeyyāti tehi uppannakappe nivattento ‘‘etasmiṃ antare’’ti āha. Kāmaṃ dīpaṅkarabuddhuppāde ayaṃ bhagavā abhinīhāramakāsi, tassa pana bhagavato nibbatti imassa abhinīhārato purimatarāti vuttaṃ ‘‘amhākaṃ…pe… nibbattiṃsū’’ti.
“于无数劫之末”,是指诸大劫的无数之终结。以下各处所说,也是如此。“自上数三十千劫”,这表示在莲花上佛与善慧佛之间,有一万九千劫没有佛出世。“自上数十八千劫”,这表示在善生佛与见义佛之间,有一万二千缺一劫没有佛出世。“于九十四劫中”,这表示在见法佛与悉达多佛之间,有一万七千九百零六劫没有佛出世。“于三十一劫中”,这表示在毗婆尸佛与尸弃佛之间,有六十劫没有佛出世。所有这些劫,以及从善慧等佛出世之劫以来、在莲花上佛之后的劫,合为一处总计十万劫;在此期间,大声闻等以离转为所依,积集了种种善业。即使在无佛世尊出世的世间,独觉佛也会出现,作为那些特应教导者的福德增长助缘。“如此”等,是以总结的方式重申前说。显示巴利原文
Asaṅkhyeyyakappapariyosāneti mahākappānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyapariyosāne. Esa nayo ito paresupi. ‘‘Ito tiṃsakappasahassānaṃ uparī’’ti etena padumuttarassa bhagavato, sumedhassa ca bhagavato antare ekūnasattatikappasahassāni buddhasuññāni ahesunti dasseti. ‘‘Ito aṭṭhārasannaṃ kappasahassānaṃ uparī’’ti iminā sujātassa bhagavato, atthadassissa ca bhagavato antare ekenūnāni dvādasakappasahassāni buddhasuññāni ahesunti dasseti. ‘‘Ito catunavute kappe’’ti iminā dhammadassissa bhagavato, siddhatthassa ca bhagavato antare chādhikanavasatuttarāni sattarasakappasahassāni buddhasuññāni ahesunti dasseti. ‘‘Ekatiṃse kappe’’ti iminā vipassissa bhagavato, sikhissa ca bhagavato antare saṭṭhi kappāni buddhasuññāni ahesunti dasseti. Te sabbepi padumuttarassa bhagavato oraṃ sumedhādīhi uppannakappehi saddhiṃ samodhāniyamānā satasahassā kappā honti, yattha mahāsāvakādayo (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.21 vaṅgīsattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) vivaṭṭū panissayāni kusalāni sambhariṃsu. Buddhasuññepi loke paccekabuddhā uppajjitvā tesaṃ purisavisesānaṃ puññābhisandābhibuddhiyā paccayā honti. ‘‘Evamaya’’ntiādi vuttamevatthaṃ nigamanavasena vadati.
“那么,这是什么呢?”等,是为说明“前行相”而发起的。其中,“此”指诸佛的出世。“在劫安立的时期”,指坏劫正在安立之时。“一个无数劫”,是针对坏劫而说。“已成一平坦空旷之场”,指因山、树、灌木等及云等都已消失,世界化为一片开阔平坦的场地而安住。在“有情居处”,即器世间所应安住之处。二十竿为一寻。对“一寻量、二寻量”等中的“量”字,应这样分别结合。当水柱向下倾注时,它弥漫于一千由旬的虚空流下,所以说“成为一千由旬之量”。“乃至梵天界不坏之处”,意指乃至光音天梵天界、遍净天梵天界,乃至韦哈巴喇天梵天界。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ paneta’’ntiādi pubbanimittavibhāvanatthāya āraddhaṃ. Tattha etanti buddhānaṃ uppajjanaṃ. Kappasaṇṭhānakālasminti vivaṭṭakappassa saṇṭhahanakāle. Ekamasaṅkhyeyyanti saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyiṃ sandhāyāha. Ekaṅgaṇaṃ hutvā ṭhiteti pabbatarukkhagacchādīnaṃ, meghādīnañca abhāvena vivaṭaṃaṅgaṇaṃ hutvā ṭhite. Lokasannivāseti bhājanalokena sannivisitabbaṭṭhāne. Vīsati yaṭṭhiyo usabhaṃ. ‘‘Usabhamattā, dve usabhamattā’’tiādinā paccekaṃ mattā-saddo yojetabbo. Yojanasahassamattā hutvāti patamānāva udakadhārā yojanasahassamattaṃ ākāsaṭṭhānaṃ pharitvā pavattiyā yojanasahassamattā hutvā. Yāva avinaṭṭhabrahmalokāti yāva ābhassarabrahmalokā, yāva subhakiṇhabrahmalokā, yāva vehapphalabrahmalokāti attho.
「由风之力」:即由高九万由旬又六万由旬的持风轮之力。「大菩提座」:指大菩提座区域。它后来会毁坏,而最初安立,应知这是依法性如此。在这里,即在此区域。「成为前兆」:即成为佛陀出世的前兆。因为灌木丛是前兆的所依,所以以所依的名称来称说它。因此说「它的」等。「成为如花环所系」:即如同系上了花环一样。净居梵天们心生喜悦……而去,这是句子的连接。广果天与遍净天也含摄在内,故说「九梵天界」,因为它们事实上也属于第四识住。所谓「出发」,即进行大出家的时候。这里的「诞生」一词,由于出生状态相同,也包含了入胎。所谓「相」,即是据此推知、衡量果,也就是因。即使征象也可视为因,因为看到它必然如此,果就已经可以确定而认取了,就像阿私陀仙人在大士诞生时见到各种大人相,以这些相的必然性便认定佛的功德已经成就而认取了一样。然而,在这样认取时,以这个相为前兆的果,由于相的存在,就被视为由它的力量所成就。因此说显示巴利原文
Vātavasenāti saṭṭhisahassādhikanavayojanasatasahassubbedhassa sandhārakavātamaṇḍalassa vasena. Mahābodhipallaṅkoti mahābodhipallaṅkappadesamāha. Tassa pacchā vināso, paṭhamaṃ saṇṭhahanañca dhammatāvasena veditabbaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ padese. Pubbanimittaṃ hutvāti buddhappādassa pubbanimittaṃ hutvā. Pubbanimittasannissayo hi gaccho nissitavohārena tathā vutto. Tenāha ‘‘tassā’’tiādi. Kaṇṇikābaddhāni hutvāti ābaddhakaṇṇikā viya hutvā. Suddhāvāsabrahmāno attamanā…pe… gacchantīti yojanā. Vehapphalepi subhakiṇhe saṅgahetvā ‘‘nava brahmalokā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi te catutthiṃyeva viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ bhajanti. Nikkhamantesūti mahābhinikkhamanaṃ abhinikkhamantesu. Abhijāti panettha jātibhāvasāmaññena gabbhokkantiyāva saṅgahitā. Nimīyati anumīyati phalaṃ etenāti nimittaṃ, kāraṇaṃ. Ñāpakampi hi kāraṇaṃ disvā tassa abyabhicārībhāvena phalaṃ siddhameva katvā gaṇhi, yathā taṃ asito isi abhijātiyaṃ mahāpurisassa lakkhaṇāni disvā tesaṃ abyabhicārībhāvena buddhaguṇe siddhe eva katvā gaṇhi, evaṃ pana gayhamānaṃ tannimittakaṃ phalaṃ tadānubhāvena siddhaṃ viya voharīyati tabbhāve bhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ nimittānaṃ ānubhāvenā’’tiādi. Tathā cāha bhagavā ‘‘so tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato…pe… rājā samāno kiṃ labhati, buddho samāno kiṃ labhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.202, 204) ca evamādi. Imamatthanti pañca buddhā imasmiṃ kappe uppajjissantīti imamatthaṃ yāthāvato jāniṃsu.
关于寿限区分等的解释。显示巴利原文
Jātiparicchedādivaṇṇanā
5-7 「以劫为区分之力」:即通过「于此,这第九十一劫」等说法,在那些有佛出世的劫中,通过对各个劫的限定与遍知来作简别。因为确定了「这是此」之后,再加以区别而了知,这就是区分、限定。「小」:指短暂。「轻」:指轻盈,因为这里是指寿命,所以也就是短的意思。因此说:「这两个词都是少、小的同义词。」显示巴利原文
5-7.Kappaparicchedavasenāti ‘‘ito so ekanavute kappe’’tiādinā yattha yattha kappe te te buddhā uppannā, tassa tassa kappassa paricchindanavasena parijānanavasena. ‘‘Idaṃ ta’’nti hi niyametvā paricchijja jānanaṃ paricchindanaṃ paricchedo. Parittanti ittaraṃ. Lahukanti sallahukaṃ, āyuno adhippetattā rassanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘ubhayametaṃ appakasseva vevacana’’nti.
「或者少,或者更多」:这是总说不分多少的情况,也就是说「二十或三十」等,以不定的方式,随其所得来判定,并且显示这种情况并不普遍,所以说:「然而这样长寿的人极为难得。」这是将这一特殊限定放在具体人物上加以显示,即说「其中,毗舍佉」等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti avisesajotanaṃ ‘‘vīsaṃ vā tiṃsaṃ vā’’tiādinā aniyamitavaseneva yathālābhato vavatthapetvā ayañca nayo apacuroti dassento ‘‘evaṃ dīghāyuko pana atidullabho’’ti āha. Idaṃ taṃ visesavavatthāpanaṃ puggalesu pakkhipitvā dassento ‘‘tattha visākhā’’tiādimāha.
如果这样,为何我们的世尊不活那么长久呢?难道大菩萨在最后一生不是以极为殊胜的福行而结生吗?这是事实。为说明其中理由,故说「然而毗婆尸等佛……」。其中,由于种姓以及慈住,行所造识以慈为前导,因为其结生识与慈特别相应。其殊胜之处在于:由于常以安隐寻为亲近缘,故与喜悦相应;由于以不共于他人、无需他人教导的智胜为亲近缘,故与智相应;并且是「无行」的。他们的寿量无量:这是由于支持殊胜、依止殊胜、敌对远离以及转起行相殊胜,而其原因在于具有不可量的威力。其中,长久以来相续为波罗蜜所修习,是支持殊胜;无贪等意乐的成就,是依止殊胜;对利养悭吝等恶法的镇伏,是敌对远离;为令一切众生脱离轮回众苦而修习,是转起行相殊胜。应当如此了知。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ kasmā amhākaṃ bhagavā tattakampi kālaṃ na jīvi, nanu mahābodhisattā carimabhave ativiyauḷāratamena puññābhisaṅkhārena paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantīti? Saccametanti. Tattha kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vipassīādayo panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha abhijātiyā mettāṭhānatāya abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa mettāpubbabhāgatā. Tadanuguṇañhi tesaṃ visesato paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Tassa visesato bahulaṃ khemavitakkūpanissayatāya somanassasahagatatā, anaññasādhāraṇaparopadesarahitañāṇavisesūpanissayatāya ñāṇasampayuttatā, asaṅkhārikatā ca veditabbā, asaṅkhyeyyaṃ āyu ādhāravisesato, nissayavisesato, paṭipakkhadūrībhāvato, pavattiākāravisesato ca aparimeyyānubhāvatāya kāraṇassa. Tattha cirataraṃ kālaṃ santānassa pāramitāparibhāvitatā ādhāravisesatā. Alobhajjhāsayādiāsayasampadā nissayavisesatā. Lābhamacchariyādipāpadhammavikkhambhanaṃ paṭipakkhadūrībhāvo. Sabbasattānaṃ sakalavaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthāya āyūhanā pavattiākāraviseso veditabbo.
这一道理,于一切大菩萨最后一生造作投生之业时是共通的,因此其果报也必然等同,故说:「如是,一切佛皆有无量寿量」(iti sabbe buddhā asaṅkhyeyyāyukā),意思是「具有以不可计量的时间为限的寿命」。虽有修习之业能感得无量寿,但诸佛仅随人间最高寿限而住世便入般涅槃,因为无再久住以利益众生的必要,或者说这就是法性。然而,注疏中对于不能再久住的原因,提到「由于时节、饮食的缺失」(《长部注》2.5)。但不能说「这不适用于在世间出生、成长的如来」,因为事实上,他们的病痛、疲累等确是存在的。所谓时节、饮食之力:即由于不圆满的时节与饮食,以及圆满的时节与饮食之力,寿命依此次第而有损减或增长。这里所说的「寿命」是指最高寿量。对此应说的内容,已在《梵网经义疏》中说过了。显示巴利原文
Ayañca nayo sabbesaṃ mahābodhisattānaṃ carimabhavābhinibbattakakammāyūhane sādhāraṇoti tassa phalenāpi ekasadiseneva bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘iti sabbe buddhā asaṅkhyeyyāyukā’’ti, asaṅkhyeyyakālāvatthānāyukāti attho. Asaṅkhyeyyāyukasaṃvattanasamatthaṃ paricitaṃ kammaṃ hoti, buddhā pana tadā manussānaṃ paramāyuppamāṇānurūpameva kālaṃ ṭhatvā parinibbāyanti tato paraṃ ṭhatvā sādhetabbapayojanābhāvato, dhammatāvesāti vā veditabbā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana tato paraṃ pana aṭṭhānassa ‘‘utubhojanavipattiyā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.5) kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘taṃ lokasādhāraṇaṃ loke jātasaṃvuddhānaṃ tathāgatānaṃ na hotī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ. Tathā hi nesaṃ rogakilamathādayo hontiyeva. Utubhojanavasenāti asampannassa, sampannassa ca utuno, bhojanassa ca vasena yathākkamaṃ āyu hāyatipi vaḍḍhatipi. Āyūti ca paramāyu adhippetaṃ. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ brahmajālādiṭīkāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.40) vuttameva.
现在,为了从集起处开始显示其义,而说「其中,当……时」(tattha yadā)等。投入于法的人称为「如法者」,不投入于法的人称为「不如法者」,即从事杀害等非法行的人。因为随顺统治者及受他人见解影响,遂成为不如法者。「热云天神」(uṇhavalāhakā devatā)是发起云层而成为热时节之缘的天子。据说,当他们心生此念时,便同时在所愿之处遍布热气,以不太厚的云层或此或彼地覆满天空而展开。冷云、雨云也同样如此。而「雾云天神」应知为离于冷热雨、唯发起雾层的天子。对于「她们」,此处以「友」一词相连接。前面所说的七种天虽皆属四天王天,但于此一一说明其差别后,再从总体上把握其余初欲界天,故说「四天王天」。由于这些天的不如法性——即以国王的不如法为根本,经由小王等的不如法辗转相续,所引生的诸天不如法性——使月亮、太阳运行不均:由于以多病等不可意果为亲近缘,被前述不如法之共业力所驱,受不均等吹动之风所迫,月亮、太阳围绕须弥山而不均等地运行。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ samudāgamato paṭṭhāya dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dhamme niyuttā dhammikā, na dhammikā adhammikā, hiṃsādiadhammapasutā. Adhammikameva hoti issarajanānaṃ anuvattanena, paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanena ca. Uṇhavalāhakā devatāti uṇhautuno paccayabhūtameghamālāsamuṭṭhāpakā devaputtā. Tesaṃ kira tathā cittuppādasamakālameva yathicchitaṭṭhānaṃ uṇhaṃ pharamānā valāhakamālā nātibahalā ito cito nabhaṃ chādentī vitanoti. Esa nayo sītavalāhakavassavalāhakāsu. Abbhavalāhakā pana devatā sītuṇhavassehi vinā kevalaṃ abbhapaṭalasseva samuṭṭhāpakā veditabbā. Tāsanti ettha ‘‘mittā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā yojanā. Kāmaṃ heṭṭhā vuttā sattavidhāpi devatā cātumahārājikāva tā pana tena tena visesena vatvā idāni tadaññe paṭhamabhūmike kāmāvacaradeve sāmaññato gaṇhanto ‘‘cātumahārājikā’’ti āha. Tāsaṃ adhammikatāyāti rājūnaṃ adhammikabhāvamūlakena uparājādiadhammikabhāvaparamparābhatena tāsaṃ devatānaṃ adhammikabhāvena. Visamaṃ candimasūriyā pariharantīti bahvābādhatādi aniṭṭhaphalūpanissayabhūtassa yathāvuttaadhammikatāsaññitassa sādhāraṇassa pāpakammassa balena visamaṃ vāyantena vāyunā pīḷiyamānā candimasūriyā sineruṃ parikkhipantā visamaṃ parivattanti yathāmaggena nappavattantīti . Assidaṃ yathā candimasūriyānaṃ visamaparivattanaṃ visamavātasaṅkhobhahetukaṃ, evaṃ utuvassādivisamappavattīti dassetuṃ ‘‘vāto yathāmaggena na vāyatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Devatānanti sītavalāhakadevatādidevatānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sītuṇhabhedo utū’’tiādi. Tasmiṃ asampajjanteti tasmiṃ yathāvutte vassabījabhūte utumhi yathākālaṃ sampattiṃ anupagacchante.
将“天不正确地降雨”的略说之义展开,即说“有时”(kadāci)等。其中,“有时降雨”,指有时在非降雨时节降雨;“有时不降雨”,指有时在该降雨的时节却不降雨;“某处降雨,某处不降雨”,是就地区而言。“即使降雨”等句,是对“有时降雨,有时不降雨”这两句意义的解说。“失去香、味、色等”:以“等”字包含失去营养。“在一个地方”:比如煮饭容器的某一边。“涨出米粒”:即煮熟后溢出的米粒。“以三种方式”:指完全未熟、部分已熟、过熟这三种方式。“烧煮”:即走向坏灭。“短寿者”:此处还应加上“丑色”。如此,由于时节和食物的原因,寿命便会出现减损;虽然直接的业因尚未耗尽,但因支持缘极度羸弱,也会如此。显示巴利原文
‘‘Na sammā devo vassatī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘kadācī’’tiādimāha. Tattha kadāci vassatīti kadāci avassanakāle vassati. Kadāci na vassatīti kadāci vassitabbakāle na vassati. Katthaci vassati, katthaci na vassatīti padesamāha. ‘‘Vassantopī’’tiādi ‘‘kadāci vassati, kadāci na vassatī’’ti padadvayasseva atthavivaraṇaṃ. Vigatagandhavaṇṇarasādīti ādi-saddena nirojataṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ekasmiṃ padeseti bhattapacanabhājanassa ekapasse. Uttaṇḍulanti pākato ukkantataṇḍulaṃ. Tīhākārehīti sabbaso apariṇataṃ, ekadesena pariṇataṃ, dupariṇatañcāti evaṃ tīhākārehi. Paccati pakkāsayaṃ upagacchati. Appāyukāti ettha ‘‘dubbaṇṇā cā’’tipi vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ utubhojanavasena āyu hāyati hetumhi aparikkhīṇepi paccayassa paridubbalattā.
“然而,当……时”(Yadā panā)等文,是善的一面,应以前文所述相反的情况来了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadā panā’’tiādi sukkapakkhassa attho vuttavipariyāyena veditabbo.
应当了知,寿命先是逐渐增长,而后又变为减损。何以故?因为在一个小劫中,不会有多位佛陀出现,唯有一位出现。今为详细显示此义,而说“如何”(kathaṃ)等。“四”是表示极度连结的对格语。“在各种寿量之中”(yaṃyaṃāyuparimāṇesu)是指种种最高寿量当中。“对于他们”(tesampi)是指对于诸佛。那样的寿量即是如此,如前所说的理由。显示巴利原文
Vaḍḍhitvāvaḍḍhitvā parihīnanti veditabbaṃ. Kasmā? Na hi ekasmiṃ antarakappe aneke buddhā uppajjanti, eko eva pana uppajjatīti. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Cattāri ṭhatvāti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Yaṃyaṃāyuparimāṇesūti yattakayattakaparamāyuppamāṇesu. Tesampīti buddhānaṃ. Taṃ tadeva āyuparimāṇaṃ hoti, tattha kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
觉悟品注释显示巴利原文
Bodhiparicchedavaṇṇanā
8 “根处”(Mūle),指根的部分附近。那又指它的下方之处,因此说“在波吒厘树的下方”(pāṭalirukkhassa heṭṭhā)。“那一天”(Taṃdivasaṃ),指自己出生的那天,也指世尊证得正等觉之日。据说,那棵菩提树如同佳美的娑罗树,先前在地中生长,于正等觉之日破地而出,高达一百宝,同时扩展,遍满虚空而住立。也有人说,此树以树之形态,与其他树显出种种不同:以紧密联结的粗茎为柄,花朵仿佛系结于花蕊座上一般。“单一覆蔽”(Ekasañchannā),是说被花朵无间隔地密集覆盖,此处系结的花鬘、彼处撒下的花团,以及四处散落的各种离柄花,共同明亮辉耀。“相互具足庄严”(aññamaññaṃ sirīsampattāni),是说彼此皆以祥瑞与美丽而具足。“佛陀功德威光的庄严”(Buddhaguṇavibhavasiri),指正自觉者们所应证得的功德威显之庄严。“正在通达”(Paṭivijjhamāno),指正在证得。显示巴利原文
8.Mūleti mūlāvayavassa samīpe. Taṃ pana tassā heṭṭhāpadeso hotīti āha ‘‘pāṭalirukkhassa heṭṭhā’’ti. Taṃdivasanti attanā jātadivase, taṃdivasanti vā taṃ bhagavato abhisambodhidivase. So kira bodhirukkho sālakalyāṇī viya pathaviyā abbhantare eva puretaraṃ vaḍḍhento abhisambodhidivase pathaviṃ ubbhijjitvā uṭṭhito ratanasataṃ ucco, tāvadeva ca vitthato hutvā nabhaṃ pūrento aṭṭhāsi. Ayampi kiretassa rukkhabhāvena viya aññehi vemattatā. Ghanasaṃhatanāḷavaṇṭatāya kaṇṇikabaddhehi viya pupphehi. Ekasañchannāti pupphānaṃ nirantaratāya ekajjhaṃ sañchannā, tattha tattha nibaddha…pe… samujjalanti tahaṃ tahaṃ olambitakusumadāmehi ceva tahaṃ tahaṃ khittamālāpiṇḍīhi ca ito cito vippakiṇṇavividhavaṇṭamuttapupphehi ca sammadeva ujjalaṃ. Aññamaññaṃ sirīsampattānīti aññamaññassa siriyā sobhāya sampannāni. Buddhaguṇavibhavasirinti sammāsambuddhehi abhigantabbaguṇavibhūtisobhaṃ. Paṭivijjhamānoti adhigacchanto.
「白芒果树」指结白色果实的芒果树。「那相同」是说,与波吒厘树所述的那个尺寸一样。「一边」是指在某一侧。「极为甘甜」指味道非常甜。显示巴利原文
Setambarukkhoti setavaṇṇaphalo ambarukkho. Tadevāti pāṭaliyā vuttappamāṇameva. Ekatoti ekapasse. Surasānīti sumadhurarasāni.
「仅一结跏趺座」指只有单一一个结跏趺座的地方。那棵树被称为“菩提树”,就是因为在那下面(佛陀们)觉悟的缘故。显示巴利原文
Ekova pallaṅkoti ekova pallaṅkappadeso. So so rukkho ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati bujjhanti etthāti katvā.
「声闻双贤品」注释显示巴利原文
Sāvakayugaparicchedavaṇṇanā
9 「声闻分」意指声闻双贤的分判。所谓「堪达底沙」,是将两者合说为一而得名,故说「堪达与底沙」;他们相对于佛陀,或是同母胞弟,或为同父异母之弟,因而是「同父的幼弟」。这是相对于其余王子而言。为了彰显他所证得的殊胜功德,在宣说了「已达慧波罗蜜之巅」之后,接着便开示「由世尊尸弃……」等内容。显示巴利原文
9.Sāvakaparicchedeti sāvakayugaparicchede. ‘‘Khaṇḍatissa’’nti dvepi ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ekattavasena vuttanti āha ‘‘khaṇḍo ca tisso cā’’ti, buddhānaṃ sahodaro, vemātikopi vā jeṭṭhabhātā na hotīti ‘‘ekapitiko kaniṭṭhabhātā’’ti vuttaṃ. Avasesehi puttehi. ‘‘Paññāpāramiyā matthakaṃ patto’’ti vatvā tassa matthakappattaṃ guṇavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sikhinā bhagavatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「优多罗」意为最上。再次提及「优多罗」,是以名号称这位长老。「彼岸」指最极、最顶。「慧境」指智慧所行境界。此乃依转起之依处而说转起。显示巴利原文
Uttaroti uttamo. Puna uttaroti theraṃ nāmena vadati. Pāranti parakoṭimatthakaṃ. Paññāvisayeti paññādhikāre. Pavattiṭṭhānavasena hi pavattiṃ vadati.
「声闻集会品」注释显示巴利原文
Sāvakasannipātaparicchedavaṇṇanā
10 「布萨」指诵持别解脱戒经。「于第二、第三」是指第二次及第三次声闻集会之时。「同此方法」是说此仪轨亦适用于四支具足。从发愿开始叙述其事迹后,便当阐明出家之事。然由这些在《满足希求》(即《增支部注释》A. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.1.211)中已有详述,故当依彼处所说之轨则来理解。显示巴利原文
10.Uposathanti āṇāpātimokkhaṃ. Dutiyatatiyesūti dutiye, tatiye ca sāvakasannipāte. Eseva nayoti caturaṅgikataṃ atidisati. Abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya vatthuṃ kathetvā pabbajjā dīpetabbā, sā pana yasmā manorathapūraṇiyaṃ aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.211) vitthārato āgatā, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbāti.
「侍者品」注释显示巴利原文
Upaṭṭhākaparicchedavaṇṇanā
11 「常随侍者身份」:指从最初直至般涅槃,确定担任侍者的身份。然而,世尊初成正觉时,曾有多位不固定的侍者。因此说:「世尊的……」等。现在,为说明阿难长老是出于何种原因、以何种方式成为导师的常随侍者,而叙述:「在那里,有一次……」等。其中,「他说“我走这条路吧!”」乃是被那将导致不幸与灾祸的业所催促。于是,世尊并未告知他那件事,只是指着安全的道路说:「来吧,比丘,我们走这条路。」为何世尊不将此事告诉他呢?因为即使告知,他也不会相信、不会接受,那件事只会对他长夜不利、带来痛苦。「Te」是指他们的行走,或读作「taṃ」。显示巴利原文
11.Nibaddhupaṭṭhākabhāvanti ārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva parinibbānā niyataupaṭṭhākabhāvaṃ. Aniyatuupaṭṭhākā pana bhagavato paṭhamabodhiyaṃ bahū ahesuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi. Idāni ānandatthero yena kāraṇena satthu nibaddhupaṭṭhākabhāvaṃ upagato, yathā ca upagato, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha ekadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ahaṃ iminā maggena gacchāmī’’ti āha anayabyasanāpādakena kammunā codiyamāno . Atha naṃ bhagavā tamatthaṃ anārocetvāva khemaṃ maggaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ehi bhikkhu iminā gacchāmā’’ti āha. Kasmā panassa bhagavā tamatthaṃ nārocesīti? Ārocitepi asaddahanto nādiyissati. Tañhi tassa hoti dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāyātiti. Teti te gamanaṃ, ‘‘ta’’nti vā pāṭho.
「Anvāsatta」:指被追随或被逼迫。由对法的恭敬而生的悚惧,称为法悚惧,如说「当我们还在时,世尊竟发生这样的事」。舍利弗长老说「我来侍奉」,其实正是在表达此意,因此经中说:「尊者,我,你们……」等。他又说:「我的那个方向并非空虚」,意思是我那个方向是不空虚的。他还说出了原因:「您的教诫如同诸佛陀的教诫。」显示巴利原文
Anvāsattoti anubaddho, upadduto vā. Dhammagāravanissito saṃvego dhammasaṃvego ‘‘amhesu nāma tiṭṭhantesu bhagavatopi īdisaṃ jāta’’nti. ‘‘Ahaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmī’’ti vadanto dhammasenāpati atthato evaṃ vadanto nāma hotīti ‘‘ahaṃ bhante tumhe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asuññāyeva me sā disāti asuññāyeva mama sā disā. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘tava ovādo buddhānaṃ ovādasadiso’’ti.
「不会让他住」:意思是他在一间香室中将得不到住处。所谓「背对着说的法」,是指经教的宣说。而阿毗达摩的教导,对他更是在背后宣说的,更遑论主动请求了。其读诵传承也是由舍利弗长老开创的。何以故?因为长老从比丘那里接受了此法蕴,它如同义释无碍解一般,是法蕴的一部分。不过,另有一些人说:「法藏师依次在二论、三论中,每天寻找机会向世尊提问,世尊也以提示要点的形式为他解答每一个问题。如此,阿毗达摩虽是导师在背后说的,长老却是当面领受的。」这一切都需审察之后方可信受。显示巴利原文
Vasituṃ na dassatīti ekagandhakuṭiyaṃ vāsaṃ na labhissatīti adhippāyo. Parammukhā desitassāpi dhammassāti suttantadesanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Abhidhammadesanā panassa parammukhāva pavattā pageva yācanāya. Tassā vācanāmaggopi sāriputtattherappabhavo. Kasmā? So niddesapaṭisambhidā viya therassa bhikkhuto gahitadhammakkhandhapakkhiyo. Apare pana ‘‘dhammabhaṇḍāgāriko paṭipāṭiyā tikadukesu devasikaṃ katokāso bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi, bhagavāpissa pucchitapucchitaṃ nayadānavasena vissajjesi. Evaṃ abhidhammopi satthārā parammukhā desitopi therena sammukhā paṭiggahitova ahosī’’ti vadanti. Sabbaṃ vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.
“上首侍者”指由于恭敬承事而成为最胜的侍者。长老自从获得侍者之位以来,便以两种水、三种齿木、足部护理、打扫香室及周边等种种事务侍奉世尊,心中推量:“此时应令导师得此物,彼时应作此事。”并一一落实。他手持大火炬,终夜绕行香室周边九匝。他这般思惟:“倘若昏眠袭来,世尊呼唤时,我或许无法应答。”因此彻夜不曾熄灭手中火炬。故称为“上首侍者”。显示巴利原文
Aggupaṭṭhākoti upaṭṭhāne sakkaccakāritāya aggabhūto upaṭṭhāko. Thero hi upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhakālato paṭṭhāya bhagavantaṃ duvidhena udakena, tividhena dantakaṭṭhena, pādaparikammena, gandhakuṭipariveṇasammajjanenāti evamādīhi kiccehi upaṭṭhahanto ‘‘imāya nāma velāya satthu idaṃ nāma laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, idaṃ nāma kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā taṃ taṃ nipphādento mahatiṃ daṇḍadīpikaṃ gahetvā ekarattiṃ gandhakuṭipariveṇaṃ nava vāre anupariyāyati. Evaṃ hissa ahosi ‘‘sace me thinamiddhaṃ okkameyya, bhagavati pakkosante paṭivacanaṃ dātuṃ nāhaṃ sakkuṇeyya’’nti, tasmā sabbarattiṃ daṇḍadīpikaṃ hatthena na muñcati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aggupaṭṭhāko’’ti.
12 12.“父系范围”:因父母的出生地与城镇范围是通过父系来确定的,故称为“父系范围”。显示巴利原文
12. Pitumātujātanagaraparicchedo pitumukhena āgatattā ‘‘pitiparicchedo’’ti vutto.
“进入了精舍”即进入了香室。“讲到这里为止”,是说为毗婆尸等七位佛陀开示了以劫的界限等九种方式庄严的、与此宿住相关联的教法。那么,世尊为何在此处只开示毗婆尸等七位佛陀的宿住,而非如《佛种姓经》中所说,开示二十五位乃至更多佛陀呢?这是因为缺乏相应的因缘,也并无必要。因为,在《佛种姓经》中(佛种姓75):显示巴利原文
Vihāraṃ pāvisīti gandhakuṭiṃ pāvisi. Ettakaṃ kathetvāti kappaparicchedādinavavārapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ vipassīādīnaṃ sattannaṃ buddhānaṃ pubbenivāsapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ ettāvatā desanaṃ desetvā. Kasmā panettha bhagavā vipassīādīnaṃ sattannaṃyeva buddhānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ kathesi, na buddhavaṃsadesanāyaṃ (bu. vaṃ. 64 gāthādayo) viya pañcavīsatiyā buddhānaṃ, tato vā pana bhiyyoti? Anadhikārato, payojanābhāvato ca. Buddhavaṃsadesanāyañhi (bu. vaṃ. 75) –
‘‘Kīdiso te mahāvīra, abhinīhāro naruttama; Kamhi kāle tayā vīra, patthitā bodhimuttamā’’ti. ādinā –
此处即以彼问作为“机缘”(adhikāra),作为“事由”(aṭṭhuppatti)而说。在那个问题中,菩萨曾在某位正自觉者的足下发起了宏大的誓愿——以燃灯佛世尊为起始,他从二十四位佛陀处获得菩提授记,并在各处圆满诸波罗蜜。他们佛陀所行之道,即是“宿住”(pubbenivāsa),此处亦兼述其自身所行道。然而,在此经中并没有那样的机缘,也就是从燃灯佛或更早的佛陀讲起、来叙述宿住。因此,不同于《佛种姓经》的教说,此处并未对宿住作详细展开。再者,佛陀说法是随顺堪受教化众生的慧力,而非随顺佛陀自慧的力量;是故在《佛种姓经》中,教说以上首弟子、大弟子,以及那样的天众、梵天众为主而详尽展开。但在此处,世尊以普通弟子和那样的天众为主而讲述宿住,所以只说了七位佛陀的宿住。的确,世尊为了以能吸引人的方式激励他们,用这种带有种种分别的说法,并未将教说推至最顶点,便步入香室。也正因如此,随顺这一教说,才形成了《阿吒那胝护卫经》等。显示巴利原文
Pavattaṃ taṃ pucchaṃ adhikāraṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā yassa sammāsambuddhassa pādamūle attanā mahābhinīhāro kato, taṃ dīpaṅkaraṃ bhagavantaṃ ādiṃ katvā yesaṃ catuvīsatiyā buddhānaṃ santikā bodhiyā laddhabyākaraṇo hutvā tattha tattha pāramiyo pūresi, tesaṃ paṭipattisaṅkhāto pubbenivāso, attano ca paṭipatti kathitā, idha pana tādiso adhikāro natthi , yena dīpaṅkarato paṭṭhāya, tato vā pana purato buddhe ārabbha pubbenivāsaṃ katheyya. Tasmā na ettha buddhavaṃsadesanāyaṃ viya pubbenivāso vitthārito. Yasmā ca buddhānaṃ desanā nāma desanāya bhājanabhūtānaṃ puggalānaṃ ñāṇabalānurūpā, na attano ñāṇabalānurūpā, tasmā tattha aggasāvakānaṃ, mahāsāvakānaṃ, (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.21 vaṅgīsattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) tādisānañca devabrahmānaṃ vasena desanā vitthāritā. Idha pana pakatisāvakānaṃ, tādisānañca devatānaṃ vasena pubbenivāsaṃ kathento sattannameva buddhānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ kathesi. Tathā hi ne bhagavā palobhanavasena samuttejetuṃ sappapañcatāya kathāya desanaṃ matthakaṃ apāpetvāva gandhakuṭiṃ pāvisi. Tathā ca imissā eva desanāya anusārato āṭānāṭiyaparitta- (dī. ni. 3.275) desanādayo pavattā.
再者,在此经中,世尊为了收摄阐明自己「净居天游行」的后文教法,只讲述了毗婆尸等七位正自觉者的宿命。因为唯有这七位佛陀的弟子,无论过去还是现在,都仍住于净居天界;其他佛陀的弟子则已般涅槃,不在该处。相传:「悉达多佛、提舍佛、弗沙佛的弟子们,虽也化生至净居天,但在化生的当下——如同此法中的优波迦等人——便证得阿拉汉果,不久即般涅槃,并未在天界各处住满应有的寿量。」同样地,对于那些教法至今仍一义确定而无隐没的正自觉者,世尊为作称扬,也随顺所化众生的意乐,于本经中只开示了毗婆尸等世尊的宿命。至于「菩萨成佛无有先后之决定」,则是依于一世界中众生辗转受生的情形而说,与此处所说并无相违,应作如是解。「无间而臻极顶」是说:从最初开始,直至诵出巴帝摩卡,乃至佛事圆满成就,一直达到最高峰、最极致。「尚未说出」则如此衔接:还未说到那个程度。显示巴利原文
Apicettha bhagavā attano suddhāvāsacārikāvibhāviniyā uparidesanāya saṅgahatthaṃ vipassīādīnaṃ eva sattannaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ kathesi. Tesaṃyeva hi sāvakā tadā ceva etarahi ca suddhāvāsabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitā, na aññesaṃ parinibbutattā. ‘‘Siddhatthatissaphussānaṃ kira buddhānaṃ sāvakā suddhāvāsesu upapannā upapattisamanantarameva imasmiṃ sāsane upakādayo viya arahattaṃ adhigantvā nacirasseva parinibbāyiṃsu, na tattha tattha yāvatāyukaṃ aṭṭhaṃsū’’ti vadanti. Tathā yesaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ paṭivedhasāsanaṃ ekaṃsato nicchaye na ajjāpi dharati, na antarahitaṃ, te eva kittento vipassīādīnaṃyeva bhagavantānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ imasmiṃ sutte kathesi veneyyajjhāsayavasena. Apubbācarimaniyamo pana aparāparaṃ saṃsaraṇakasattavāsavasena ekissā lokadhātuyā icchitoti na tenetaṃ virujjhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nirantaraṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvāti abhijātito paṭṭhāya yāva pātimokkhuddeso yāva tā buddhakiccasiddhi, tāva matthakaṃ sikhaṃ pāpetvā. Na tāva kathitoti yojanā.
「法脉」(tantin)指法的传统,即「教法」(pariyatti)的意思。为了阐明如「子之子的母亲」、「无碍处寺院」、「财施寺院」、「施者」等众多(sambahula)义理而展开的段落,即称为「众多段落」(sambahulavāra)。显示巴利原文
Tantinti dhammatantiṃ, pariyattinti attho. Puttaputtamātuyānavihāradhanavihāradāyakādīnaṃ sambahulānaṃ atthānaṃ vibhāvanavasena pavattavāro sambahulavāro.
以下是「众多段落」的注释。显示巴利原文
Sambahulavāravaṇṇanā
这一段虽未出现于经文正文中,但因注疏中有载,故应引来加以阐明。为说明这点,论师宣说了「以一切菩萨……」等语作为开头。「家族传承」(kulavaṃsa)是指家族的血统次第。「传统」(paveṇī)即「相续」(paramparā)。在问及「为何」会有儿子出生这一问题之后,论师以「以一切知菩萨……」等语作答,以此表明:菩萨们出生的城市等之所以被知晓,正是为了让人了知他们确为人身;否则,所期盼的佛陀事业之圆满成就便不可能发生。这是因为,大士们于最后一生,唯会出现在「人间」(manussaloka),而不会出现在其他之处。显示巴利原文
Kāmañcāyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ anāgato, aṭṭhakathāsu āgatattā pana ānetvā dīpetabboti taṃ dīpento ‘‘sabbabodhisattānañhī’’tiādimāha. Kulavaṃso kulānukkamo. Paveṇīti paramparā. ‘‘Kasmā’’ti puttuppattiyā kāraṇaṃ pucchitvā taṃ vissajjento ‘‘sabbaññubodhisattānañhī’’tiādimāha, tena tesaṃ jātanagarādi paññāyamānaṃ ekaṃsato manussabhāvasañjānanatthaṃ icchitabbaṃ, aññathā yathādhippetabuddhakiccasiddhi eva na siyāti dasseti, yato mahāsattānaṃ carimabhave manussaloke eva pātubhāvo, na aññattha.
以下是「众多部分的限定」的注释。显示巴利原文
Sambahulaparicchedavaṇṇanā
“罗睺”(rāhu)的意思是,它夺走(raheti)、令舍弃(cajāpeti)月亮等天体的殊胜光辉,所以称为罗睺,即“罗睺的执取”(rāhuggaho)。而在这里,是取其比喻义,说他像“罗睺”一样,故称“罗睺”。至于“束缚”(bandhana),那是着眼于它是“无义”(anattha)生起之处而说的。同样地,大家便引用大士自己说过的那个词,为那男孩取名为“罗睺罗”(Rāhula)。“Atha”一词只是个小品词。“Rocinī”的意思是,她具有光耀的性质,即形体光辉灿烂。“Rucaggatī”的意思是,她成就了达到晨光(pabhāta)般的光耀(ruca);这个词是插入了一个 ga 音而说的。因为她是“女宝”(itthiratana),在整个人间的一切女性当中,她的身体就像被遮蔽了一样,不会显露,所以称为“频婆”(Bimbā)。显示巴利原文
Candādīnaṃ sobhāvisesaṃ raheti cajāpetīti rāhu, rāhuggaho, idha pana rāhu viyāti rāhu. Bandhananti ca anatthuppattiṭṭhānataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tathā mahāsattena vuttavacanameva gahetvā kumārassa ‘‘rāhulo’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Athāti nipātamattaṃ. Rocinīti rocanasīlā, ujjalarūpāti attho. Rucaggatīti rucaṃ pabhātaṃ āgatibhūtā, ga-kārāgamaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Itthiratanabhāvato manussaloke sabbāsaṃ itthīnaṃ bimbapaṭicchannabhūtāti bimbā.
“出禅那后”(jhānā vuṭṭhāya)是指从作为基础的根本禅那出定之后。显示巴利原文
Jhānā vuṭṭhāyāti pādakajjhānato uṭṭhāya.
“八指高”:指有八指厚的厚度。“用小部分覆盖”:指横向铺设,将整个精舍场地覆盖住。“用金杖碎片”:指用条状的金杖。“金象足”:指与天然象足大小相同的金块。“如前所述”:即同样地用小部分。“用金片”:指用金块。“有相”:指具有相好的千辐轮。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhaṅgulubbedhāti aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇabahalabhāvā. Cūḷaṃsena chādetvāti tiriyabhāgena ṭhapanavasena sabbaṃ vihāraṭṭhānaṃ chādetvā. Suvaṇṇayaṭṭhiphālehīti phālappamāṇāhi suvaṇṇayaṭṭhīhi. Suvaṇṇahatthipādānīti pakatihatthipādaparimāṇāni suvaṇṇakhaṇḍāni. Vuttanayenevāti cūḷaṃseneva. Suvaṇṇakaṭṭīhīti suvaṇṇakhaṇḍehi. Salakkhaṇānanti lakkhaṇasampannānaṃ sahassārānaṃ.
“菩提座”:指成正觉时坐下的处所。“不弃舍”:因为诸佛成道时坐下的处所不会转为他处,所以不被弃舍。由此他说:“总是在同一处”。“第一脚结”:指站在最后一级台阶板上,安放右脚时落脚之处。然而,由于那处所坚固、稳定、不可被任何事物破坏,故称为“脚结”。在现今祇园精舍所在的那块土地上,过去一切诸佛安设床铺之处,正是同一地点,我们的世尊的床铺也曾安设于此,因此说“四个床脚的位置从不被弃舍”。然而,因为床有大有小,安设床位所涉及的区域也随之有大有小,并无固定;但凭借佛陀的威神力,那个区域永远保持相同的尺寸,所以说“四个床脚的位置从不被弃舍”,应当这样理解。同样地,精舍也是不被弃舍的,意思是,不弃舍先前精舍的位置。显示巴利原文
Bodhipallaṅkoti abhisambujjhanakāle nisajjaṭṭhānaṃ. Avijahitoti buddhānaṃ tathānisajjāya anaññatthabhāvībhāvato apariccatto. Tenāha ‘‘ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne hotī’’ti. Paṭhamapadagaṇṭhikāti pacchime sopānaphalake ṭhatvā ṭhapiyamānassa dakkhiṇapādassa patiṭṭhahanaṭṭhānaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā daḷhaṃ thiraṃ kenaci abhejjaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘padagaṇṭhī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ bhūmibhāge idāni jetavanamahāvihāro, tattha yasmiṃ ṭhāne purimānaṃ sabbabuddhānaṃ mañcā paññattā, tasmiṃyeva padese amhākampi bhagavato mañco paññattoti katvā ‘‘cattāri mañcapādaṭṭhānāni avijahitāneva hontī’’ti vuttaṃ. Mañcānaṃ pana mahantakhuddakabhāvena mañcapaññāpanapadesassa mahantāmahantatā appamāṇaṃ, buddhānubhāvena pana so padeso sabbadā ekappamāṇoyeva hotīti ‘‘cattāri mañcapādaṭṭhānāni avijahitāneva hontī’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vihāropi na vijahito yevāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Purimaṃ vihāraṭṭhānaṃ na pariccajatīti hi attho.
“差别”:指不同的度量,即差异性,也就是不相似性。“量度”:指身高。“精勤”:指苦行。“光”:指身光。显示巴利原文
Visiṭṭhā mattā vimattā, vimattāva vemattaṃ, visadisatāti attho. Pamāṇaṃ āroho. Padhānaṃ dukkarakiriyā. Rasmīti sarīrappabhā.
他们说:“以常人之手来量,中等身材者身高六肘,世尊的身量是此三倍,因此世尊的身高为十八肘。”另一些人则说:“以常人之手来量,中等身材者身高四肘,世尊的身量是此三倍,因此世尊执受色身的身量为十二肘;然而,世尊周身还会散发一寻长的身光,向上高出六肘,那更浓厚的光芒与色身相合,便成为十八肘。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sattānaṃ pākatikahatthena chahattho majjhimapuriso, tato tiguṇaṃ bhagavato sarīrappamāṇanti bhagavā aṭṭhārasahattho’’ti vadanti. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘manussānaṃ pākatikahatthena catuhattho majjhimapuriso, tato tiguṇaṃ bhagavato sarīrappamāṇanti bhagavā dvādasahattho upādinnakarūpadhammavasena, samantato pana byāmamattaṃ byāmappabhā pharatīti upari chahatthaṃ abbhuggato, bahalatarappabhā rūpena saddhiṃ aṭṭhārasahattho hotī’’ti.
“长久”:指长时间。显示巴利原文
Addhaniyanti dīghakālaṃ.
“系着于志趣”:意思是,在积累菩提资粮的时期,它系属于当时所起的志趣;而依此志趣、与此愿望相应的法,是广大的,且更为广大。这便是它的含义。不过,这一含义应按照《行藏注》中所说的方法来理解。在这里,由于佛陀们的身量、精进力与身光彼此不同,而这些在当前这段经文中尚未提及,故此连带它们,也把寿命与种姓的差异性一并引出加以说明——以显示它们在差异性这一点上是共通的。“于诸所通达的功德”:指所证得的一切知智等功德。或许有人会问:在菩提资粮与所化导的众生数量上,难道佛陀之间就没有差异吗?的确没有差异,但是这两项已被涵盖在“佛陀功德”这一总体概念中,故而此处未单独提出。因为,从一切佛陀的佛陀功德没有差异这一角度而言,他们为证得正觉所积累的资粮也是没有差异的。何以故?以果与因相应故。而于所化导的众生数量上,则绝对显示出差异性。这是因为,大菩萨们在因地修行时,那些当被度化的众生,其所积累的助缘与根性已经成熟,到了菩萨的最后一生,又因阿拉汉果的成就而得到进一步的培育。显示巴利原文
Ajjhāsayapaṭibaddhanti bodhisambhārasambharaṇakāle tathāpavattajjhāsayādhīnaṃ, tathāpavattapatthanānurūpaṃ vipulaṃ, vipulatarañca hotīti attho. Svāyamattho cariyāpiṭakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Ettha ca yasmā sarīrappamāṇaṃ, padhānaṃ, sarīrappabhā ca buddhānaṃ visadisāti idha pāḷiyaṃ anāgatā, tasmā tehi saddhiṃ vemattatāsāmaññena āyukulānipi idha āharitvā dīpitāni. Paṭividdhaguṇesūti adhigatasabbaññuguṇesu. Nanu ca bodhisambhāresu, veneyyapuggalaparimāṇe ca vemattaṃ natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi, tadubhayaṃ pana buddhaguṇaggahaṇena gahitameva hotīti na uddhaṭaṃ. Yadaggena hi sabbabuddhānaṃ buddhaguṇesu vemattaṃ natthi, tadaggena nesaṃ sambodhisambhāresupi vemattaṃ natthīti. Kasmā? Hetuanurūpatāya phalassa , ekanteneva veneyyapuggalaparimāṇe vemattabhāvo vibhāvito. Mahābodhisattānañhi hetuavatthāyaṃ sambhatūpanissayindriyaparipākā veneyyapuggalā carimabhave arahattasampattiyā paripositāni kamalavanāni sūriyarasmisamphassena viya tathāgataguṇānubhāvasamphassena vibodhaṃ upagacchantīti dīpesuṃ aṭṭhakathācariyā.
“宝藏瓶”:指四种大宝藏。“且已出生”:应注意,此处的“且”字,也包含了“且已发起了大志愿”这一层意思,应如此看待。因为这在《佛种姓》中曾说过:显示巴利原文
Nidhikumbhoti cattāro mahānidhayo sandhāya vadati. Jāto cāti. Ca-saddena katamahābhinīhāro cāti ayampi attho saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ buddhavaṃse –
‘‘Tārāgaṇā virocanti, nakkhattā gaganamaṇḍale; Visākhā candimāyuttā, dhuvaṃ buddho bhavissatī’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 65);
而且,注释师们还说:“正因如此,一切诸佛的大愿,确实都在毗舍佉星宿出现之时发起。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Eteneva ca sabbabuddhānaṃ visākhānakkhatteneva mahābhinīhāro hotī’’ti ca vadanti.
13 “此是去处”(Ayaṃ gatī)意思是:这是转起的方式,即现行的模式。其他随念宿住者正是以此方式随念,这是其含义。因为从死时开始直至结生,这期间的随念是向上追溯——智慧以面向过去的方式,在被称为过去、更过去、最过去等诸生的宿住中转起。因此,从结生开始直至死时,这期间的随念是向下追溯——智慧以背向过去的方式在宿住中转起,所以他说“向背后送出了智慧”。“应被死之去处”(Cutigantabbaṃ)意思是:而这所谓应被智去处所去的“去”,便是“觉了”的意思。“沉重的”(Garukaṃ)意思是:繁重的、极难行的。因此他说:“恰如在虚空留下脚印一般”。“其他更稀有的原因”(Aparampi kāraṇaṃ)意思是:相比于送出背向背后的智慧去随念那已被斩断的轮回,这是另一个更为稀奇、更令人惊叹的原因。“在此处”(Yatrā)是表示“于自身”的含义;“名为”(nāma)是表示惊奇的语气词;而“确实”(hi)这个字在这里没有实际意义。因此他(注释师)说:“那位名为如来者”。这样理解后显示巴利原文
13.Ayaṃgatīti ayaṃ pavatti pavattanākāro, aññe pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantā iminā ākārena anussarantīti attho, yasmā cutito paṭṭhāya yāva paṭisandhi, tāva anussaraṇaṃ ārohanaṃ atītaatītataraatītatamādijātisaṅkhāte pubbenivāse ñāṇassa abhimukhabhāvena pavattīti katvā. Tasmā paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya yāva cuti, tāva anussaraṇaṃ orohanaṃ pubbenivāse paṭimukhabhāvena ñāṇassa pavattīti āha ‘‘pacchāmukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ pesetvā’’ti. Cutigantabbanti yaṃ panidaṃ cutiyā ñāṇagatiyā gantabbaṃ, taṃ gamanaṃ bujjhananti attho. Garukanti bhāriyaṃ dukkaraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ākāse padaṃ dassento viyā’’ti. Aparampi kāraṇanti chinnavaṭumānussaraṇaṃ pacchāmukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ pesanato aparaṃ acchariyabbhutakāraṇaṃ. Yatrāti paccattatthe, nāmāti acchariyatthe nipāto, hi-saddo anatthako. Tenāha ‘‘yo nāma tathāgato’’ti. Evañca katvā ‘‘yatrā’’ti nipātavasena visuṃ yatra-saddaggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Papañcenti sattasantānaṃ saṃsāre vitthārentīti papañcaṃ. Kammavaṭṭaṃ vuccatīti kilesavaṭṭassa papañcaggahaṇena, vipākavaṭṭassa dukkhaggahaṇena gahitattā. Pariyādinnavaṭṭeti sabbaso khepitavaṭṭe. ‘‘Maggasīlena phalasīlenā’’ti vatvā tayidaṃ maggaphalasīlaṃ lokiyasīlapubbakaṃ, buddhānañca lokiyasīlampi lokuttarasīlaṃ viya anaññasādhāraṇaṃ evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘lokiyalokuttarasīlenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Samādhipaññāsupi eseva nayo. Samādhipakkhāti samādhi ca samādhipakkhā ca samādhipakkhā, ekadesasarūpekaseso daṭṭhabbo. Tenāha ‘‘maggasamādhinā’’tiādi, ‘‘vihāro gahito vā’’ti ca. Samādhipakkhā nāma vīriyasatiādayo.
“自己”(Sayanti)意思是:由他自己本身。“从盖等”(Nīvaraṇādīhīti)意思是:从那些盖、以及与盖同类的种种不善法,还有从寻、伺等状态中脱离出来。“‘因为已解脱,所以被称为诸解脱’”(Vimuttattā vimuttīti saṅkhyaṃ gacchantī)——这句话点明了“解脱”这个词具有“动作所成就的对象”这一含义,因为它的适用范围涵盖了八等至等境界。而“因为已解脱”这一句,应当与“由于以镇伏的方式而解脱”等解释联系起来理解。“此、彼的”(Tassa tassā)意思是:属于无常随观等这一种、那一种观智的。“以敌对支的方面”(Paccanīkaṅgavasenāti)意思是:以那应当被断除的、对立支分的方面来说。“因为在止息的边际而生起之故”(Paṭippassaddhante uppannattāti)意思是:诸烦恼的完全止息,就称为“止息”;而这止息的本身就是边际、是究竟;由于这些道智是在那应当被成就的止息边际中产生的,所以它们是依着各个道所应断除的烦恼被止显示巴利原文
Sayanti attanā. Nīvaraṇādīhīti nīvaraṇehi ceva tadekaṭṭhehi ca pāpadhammehi, vitakkavicārādīhi ca. ‘‘Vimuttattāvimuttīti saṅkhyaṃ gacchantī’’ti iminā vimutti-saddassa kammasādhanataṃ āha aṭṭhasamāpattiādivisayattā tassa. Vimuttattāti ca ‘‘vikkhambhanavasena vimuttattā’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Tassa tassāti aniccānupassanādikassa. Paccanīkaṅgavasenāti pahātabbapaṭipakkhaaṅgavasena. Paṭippassaddhante uppannattāti kilesānaṃ paṭippassambhanaṃ paṭippassaddhaṃ, so eva anto pariyosānabhāvato, tasmiṃ sādhetabbe nibbattattā, taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesānaṃ paṭippassambhanavasena pavattattāti attho. Kilesehi nissaṭatā, apagamo ca nibbānassa tehi vivittattā evāti āha ‘‘dūre ṭhitattā’’ti.
16 “法界”(Dhammadhātū)意思是:诸法的自性;从究竟意义上来说,指的就是四圣谛。“善能通达”(Suppaṭividdhāti):因为彻底断除了连同习气在内的一切烦恼,所以是极为善巧地通达了。也正因为如此,诸如一切知智、十力智等一切的佛陀功德,都已经被世尊所证得了。有些人说,“法界”指的是阿拉汉果;另一些人则认为,指的是一切知智。“以两句话”(Dvīhi padehīti):就是用两个句子。“系属于”(Ābaddhanti):是系属、联结的意思,因为接下来的教说是以此作为根本的。“于天宫游行之喧嚷”(Devacārikakolāhalanti):在经文的结尾部分,他将通过展示自己在天宫游历时,于净居天诸天之中所引发的喧嚷之事,对此进行详细审察并阐明其意义。应当这样来连接理解。“这一教说”(Ayaṃ desanāti):指的是从“诸比丘,从此……”等开始详细展开的教说。“在因缘品中”(Nidānakaṇḍeti):指的是在一开始宣说的、显示巴利原文
16.Dhammadhātūti dhammānaṃ sabhāvo, atthato cattāri ariyasaccāni. Suppaṭividdhāti suṭṭhu paṭividdhā savāsanānaṃ sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ pajahanato. Evañhi sabbaññutā, dasabalañāṇādayo cāti sabbe buddhaguṇā bhagavatā adhigatā ahesuṃ. Arahattaṃ dhammadhātūti keci. Sabbaññutañāṇanti apare. Dvīhi padehīti dvīhi vākyehi. Ābaddhanti paṭibaddhaṃ taṃmūlakattā uparidesanāya. Devacārikakolāhalanti attano devaloke cārikāyaṃ suddhāvāsadevānaṃ kutūhalappavattiṃ dassento suttantapariyosāne (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.91) vicāressati, atthato vibhāvessatīti yojanā. Ayaṃ desanāti ‘‘ito so bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.4) vitthārato pavattitadesanamāha. Nidānakaṇḍetiādito desitaṃ uddesadesanamāha. Sā hi imissā desanāya nidānaṭṭhāniyattā tathā vuttā.
菩萨法性之阐释显示巴利原文
Bodhisattadhammatāvaṇṇanā
17 在说了「毗婆尸是他的名字」之后,为了显示其名义上的含义,而说「那确实(tañca kho)」等。「种种义」(vividhe attheti):指对于隐藏的、远处的、已到达的等等,以及依青、黄等种种颜色,还有那些与此不同的、属于感官对象的东西,并且按它们所呈现的样子,以及在世俗分别中的各种不同意义。「观察善巧」(passanakusalatāya):指在‘见’上具有敏锐、精湛的能力。如实觉知所应知者,即是「菩提」(bodhi),而他因为与众生相联结,所以称为「菩萨」(bodhisatto),因此说「慧者、能觉者」(paṇḍitasatto bujjhanakasatto)。不过,若仅凭善思惟等来安立‘慧者’,那其实并没有可说的必要性。又,当他发下大誓愿之后,从那时起就一直只倾心于大菩提,所以经文说「于名为菩提等中(bodhisaṅkhātesu)留意」等等。道智是遍知智的足处,遍知智是道智的足处,这两者都被称为「菩提」。以「具念、正知」(sato sampajāno)这一句,显示他是以第四种入胎方式进入母胎的。入胎共有四种:有一类人在入胎、住胎、出胎这三时都不能正知;有一类人在入胎的第一时能正知,其余二时不能;有一类人在入胎和住胎的前两时能够正知,出胎时不能;还有一类人在三时全部都能正知。其中,第一种入胎是依世间一般大众来说的;第二种是依八十位大弟子(theragā. aṭṭha. 2.21 vaṅgīsattheragāthāvaṇṇanāya vitthāro)说的;第三种是依两位上首弟子和独觉佛说的。据说,他们被业生之风倒转,头下脚上,就像被丢进数百人深的悬崖一样被抛向产道口,又如大象从锁孔中挤出来一般,受着压迫从产道口出来,遭受极大痛苦,因此他们没有“我们正在出来”的正知。第四种是依一切知菩萨说的。他们在母胎中结生时就能觉知,住在胎中时也能觉知,出胎时同样能够觉知。因为业生之风无法将他们倒转抛出,他们是伸出双手,睁开双眼,站立而出的。「以智辨别」(ñāṇena paricchinditvā):即在前行阶段,以五大观察智及“现在我即将死去”的临死辨别智;在后阶段,以“我就在此处结生”的结生辨别智,来加以辨明了知。显示巴利原文
17. ‘‘Vipassīti tassa nāma’’nti vatvā tassa anvatthataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tañca kho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vividhe attheti tirohitavidūradesagatādike nīlādivasena nānāvidhe, tadaññe ca indriyagocarabhūte te ca yathūpagate, vohāravinicchaye cāti nānāvidhe atthe. Passanakusalatāyāti dassane nipuṇabhāvena. Yāthāvato ñeyyaṃ bujjhatīti bodhi, so eva sattayogato bodhisattoti āha ‘‘paṇḍitasatto bujjhanakasatto’’ti. Sucintitacintitādinā pana paṇḍitabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Yadā ca panānena mahābhinīhāro kato, tato paṭṭhāya mahābodhiyaṃ ekantaninnattā bodhimhi satto bodhisattoti āha ‘‘bodhisaṅkhātesū’’tiādi. Maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi sabbaññutañāṇaṃ, sabbaññutañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca maggañāṇaṃ ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Sato sampajāno’’ti iminā catutthāya gabbhāvakkantiyā okkamīti dasseti. Catasso hi gabbhāvakkantiyo idhekacco gabbho mātukucchiyaṃ okkamane, ṭhāne, nikkhamaneti tīsu ṭhānesu asampajāno hoti, ekacco paṭhame ṭhāne sampajāno, na itaresu, ekacco paṭhame, dutiye ca ṭhāne sampajāno, na tatiye, ekacco tīsupi ṭhānesu sampajāno hoti. Tattha paṭhamā gabbhāvakkanti lokiyamahājanassa vasena vuttā, dutiyā asītimahāsāvakānaṃ (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.21 vaṅgīsattheragāthāvaṇṇanāya vitthāro) vasena, tatiyā dvinnaṃ aggasāvakānaṃ, paccekabuddhānañca vasena. Te kira kammajavātehi uddhaṃpādā adhosirā anekasataporise papāte viya yonimukhe khittā tāḷacchiggaḷena hatthī viya sambādhena yonimukhena nikkhamantā mahantaṃ dukkhaṃ pāpuṇanti, tena nesaṃ ‘‘mayaṃ nikkhamāmā’’ti sampajaññaṃ na hoti. Catutthā sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ vasena. Te hi mātukucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantāpi pajānanti, tattha vasantāpi pajānanti, nikkhamanakālepi pajānanti. Na hi te kammajavātā uddhaṃpāde adhosire katvā khipituṃ sakkonti, dve hatthe pasāritvā akkhīni ummīletvā ṭhitakāva nikkhamantīti. Ñāṇena paricchinditvāti pubbabhāge pañcamahāvilokanañāṇehi ceva ‘‘idāni cavāmī’’ti cutiparicchindanañāṇena ca aparabhāge ‘‘idha mayā paṭisandhi gahitā’’ti paṭisandhiparicchindanañāṇena ca paricchijja jānitvā.
虽然五大弃舍以及亲族利益行等,原本都已包含在波罗蜜之中,但为了显示它们作为资粮中特胜之相,所以特别将其单独列出。其中,肢节弃舍、眼目弃舍、自我弃舍、王国弃舍、妻儿弃舍,这些便是五大弃舍。纵使肢节弃舍等本质上即是布施巴拉密,但为了彰显弃舍的殊胜性与极难行性,才特意将五大弃舍别立出来。也正因如此,在肢节弃舍之外,又另举了眼目弃舍;虽然同属弃舍,依然将王国弃舍与妻儿弃舍单独列出。‘亲族利益行’:即为饶益亲族而作之行,并且是依于悲悯而行。同理,为有情世间,依现法利益、来世利益与胜义利益而行利益行,即是‘世间利益行’。依于业自性智、无过失的业处、工巧处与明处,依于蕴、处等,依于对三相的思择等,对自己和他人以念处为基础而行的智行,即是‘佛行’。此佛行,从胜义上说其实就是智慧巴拉密,但显示巴利原文
Pañcannaṃ mahāpariccāgānaṃ, ñātatthacariyādīnañca satipi pāramiyā pariyāpannabhāve sambhāravisesabhāvadassanatthaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tattha aṅgapariccāgo, nayanapariccāgo, attapariccāgo, rajjapariccāgo, puttadārapariccāgoti ime pañca mahāpariccāgā. Tatthāpi kāmaṃ aṅgapariccāgādayopi dānapāramīyeva, tathāpi pariccāgavisesabhāvadassanatthañceva sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca mahāpariccāgānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tato eva ca aṅgapariccāgatopi visuṃ nayanapariccāgaggahaṇaṃ, pariccāgabhāvasāmaññepi rajjapariccāgaputtadārapariccāgaggahaṇañca kataṃ. Ñātīnaṃ atthacariyā ñātatthacariyā, sā ca kho karuṇāyanavasena. Tathā sattalokassa diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthānaṃ vasena hitacariyā lokatthacariyā. Kammassakatāñāṇavasena, anavajjakammāyatanasippāyatanavijjāṭhānavasena, khandhāyatanādivasena, lakkhaṇattayāditīraṇavasena ca attano, paresañca tattha satipaṭṭhānena ñāṇacāro buddhacariyā, sā panatthato paññāpāramīyeva, ñāṇasambhāravisesatādassanatthaṃ pana visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Buddhacariyānanti bahuvacananiddesena pubbayogapubbacariyādhammakkhānādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha gatapaccāgatavattasaṅkhātāya pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya saddhiṃ abhiññāsamāpattinipphādanaṃ pubbayogo. Dānādīsuyeva sātisayapaṭipatti pubbacariyā. ‘‘Yāva cariyāpiṭake saṅgahitā abhinīhāro pubbayogo, kāyādivivekavasena ekacariyā pubbacariyā’’ti keci. Dānādīnañceva appicchatādīnañca saṃsāranibbānesu ādīnavānisaṃsānañca vibhāvanavasena, sattānaṃ bodhittaye patiṭṭhāpanaparipācanavasena ca pavattakathā dhammakkhānaṃ. Koṭiṃ patvāti paraṃ pariyantaṃ paramukkaṃsaṃ pāpuṇitvā. Sattamahādānānīti aṭṭhavassikakāle ‘‘hadayamaṃsādīnipi yācakānaṃ dadeyya’’nti ajjhāsayaṃ uppādetvā dinnadānaṃ, maṅgalahatthidānaṃ, gamanakāle dinnaṃ sattasattakamahādānaṃ, maggaṃ gacchantena dinnaṃ assadānaṃ, rathadānaṃ, puttadānaṃ, bhariyādānanti imāni satta mahādānāni (cariyā. 79) datvā.
「决意寿尽」:即决意‘愿我此刻便死’而命终,这唯菩萨所有,而非他人。据说,菩萨住于长寿天界时,心想:‘我居此间,无法圆满积集菩提资粮。’于是便厌离那里的生活。那时,他们进入天宫,闭上双眼,决意而坐,心中作意:‘愿我的生命从此以后不要再延续。’就在心决意的当下,立时便死去。因为菩萨们的波罗蜜法已达极致现行,于每一生中,相续已因神通与等至而变得殊胜,于己身爱着极为微薄,而对众生的悲悯却极为深广,他们的决意因此变得犀利明澈,所以菩萨的心愿总能达成。他们在心意上与业上都获得了自在,因而无论投生何处,波罗蜜皆能全然增长。他们依如前所述的方式命终,随后投生到该处。实际上,我们的大菩萨就在这个大劫中,于种种生命形态里,不失禅那而命终生至梵天界,在那里仅住了极短时间,便从彼处殁没,再投生人间,专心致志地去积集波罗蜜。因此才说‘唯菩萨所有,而非他人’。经中所言‘仅隔一个结生身,波罗蜜便圆满了’,这正显示:因住于彼长寿天无助于圆显示巴利原文
‘‘Idāneva me maraṇaṃ hotū’’ti adhimuccitvā kālakaraṇaṃ adhimuttikālakiriyā, taṃ bodhisattānaṃyeva, na aññesaṃ. Bodhisattā kira dīghāyukadevaloke ṭhitā ‘‘idha ṭhitassa me bodhisambhārasambharaṇaṃ na sambhavatī’’ti katvā tattha vāsato nibbindamānasā honti, tadā vimānaṃ pavisitvā akkhīni nimīletvā ‘‘ito uddhaṃ me jīvitaṃ nappavattatū’’ti cittaṃ adhiṭṭhāya nisīdanti, cittādhiṭṭhānasamanantarameva maraṇaṃ hoti. Pāramīdhammānañhi ukkaṃsappavattiyā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ attabhāve abhiññāsamāpattīhi santānassa visesitattā attasinehassa tanubhāvena, sattesu ca mahākaruṇāya uḷārabhāvena adhiṭṭhānassa tikkhavisadabhāvāpattiyā bodhisattānaṃ adhippāyā samijjhanti. Citte, viya kammesu ca nesaṃ vasībhāvo, tasmā yattha upapannānaṃ pāramiyo sammadeva paribrūhanti. Vuttanayena kālaṃ katvā tattha upapajjanti. Tathā hi amhākaṃ mahāsatto imasmiṃyeva kappe nānājātīsu aparihīnajjhāno kālaṃ katvā brahmaloke nibbatto, appakameva kālaṃ tattha ṭhatvā tato cavitvā manussaloke nibbatto, pāramīsambharaṇapasuto ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bodhisattānaṃyeva, na aññesa’’nti. ‘‘Ekenaattabhāvena antarena pāramīnaṃ sabbaso pūritattā’’ti iminā payojanābhāvato tattha ṭhatvā adhimuttikālakiriyā nāma nāhosīti dasseti. Api ca tattha yāvatāyukaṭṭhānaṃ carimabhave anekamahānidhisamuṭṭhānapubbikāya dibbasampattisadisāya mahāsampattiyā nibbatti viya, buddhabhūtassa asadisadānādivasena anaññasādhāraṇalābhuppatti viya ca ‘‘ito paraṃ mahāpurisassa dibbasampattianubhavanaṃ nāma natthī’’ti ussāhajātassa puññasambhārassa vasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayañhettha dhammatā.
这是依人间计数而言,非依天界计数。
「前兆」(pubbanimittāni):即临死的前兆。
「不萎」(amilāyitvā):此处仅由花不萎即应知,已显示他们花鬘于色泽、香气、光彩皆无丝毫变坏。
因天神之身全无内外尘垢沾染,其随身穿着的衣物亦恒常极为清净光洁,故经文说「于衣亦然」(vatthesupi eseva nayo)。
「不冷不热」(neva sītaṃ na uṇhanti):凡为对治寒冷而过度用热,或热势过猛以致逼迫身体、引生汗水之情形,此处皆无,故说不冷不热。
「在彼时」(tasmiṃ kāleti):即指前文所述临命终时。
「滴滴」(bindubinduvasenāti):犹如所戴珍珠串线断裂,珍珠颗颗散落一般,汗水一滴一滴地流出来。
「汗」(sedāti):指汗液泄出。
牙齿碎裂,名为「齿缺」(khaṇḍiccaṃ)。头发斑白,名为「发白」(pāliccaṃ)。显示巴利原文
Manussagaṇanāvasena, na devagaṇanāvasena. Pubbanimittānīti cutiyā pubbanimittāni. Amilāyitvāti ettha amilātaggahaṇeneva tāsaṃ mālānaṃ vaṇṇasampadāyapi gandhasampadāyapi sobhāsampadāyapi avināso dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bāhirabbhantarānaṃ rajojallānaṃ lepassapi abhāvato devānaṃ sarīragatāni vatthāni sabbakālaṃ parisuddhappabhassarāneva hutvā tiṭṭhantīti āha ‘‘vatthesupi eseva nayo’’ti. Neva sītaṃ na uṇhanti yassa sītassa paṭikāravasena adhikaṃ seviyamānaṃ uṇhaṃ, sayameva vā kharataraṃ hutvā abhibhavantaṃ sarīre sedaṃ uppādeyya, tādisaṃ neva sītaṃ, na uṇhaṃ hoti. Tasmiṃ kāleti yathāvuttamaraṇāsannakāle. Bindubinduvasenāti chinnasuttāya āmuttamuttāvaliyā nipatantā muttaguḷikā viya bindu bindu hutvā. Sedāti sedadhārā muccanti. Dantānaṃ khaṇḍitabhāvo khaṇḍiccaṃ. Kesānaṃ palitabhāvo pāliccaṃ.Ādi-saddena valittacataṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Kilantarūpo attabhāvo hoti, na pana khaṇḍiccapāliccādīti adhippāyo. Ukkaṇṭhitāti anabhirati. Sā natthi uparūpari uḷārauḷārānameva bhogānaṃ visesato duvijānanānaṃ upatiṭṭhahanato. Nissasantīti uṇhaṃ nissasanti. Vijambhantīti anabhirativasena vijambhanaṃ karonti.
「即是智者」(paṇḍitā evāti):指那些具足智慧的天神。如同某些天神刚一出生便思惟:「我是以何种福业而生于此?」且能了知:「正是由彼福业,我生在此处。」同样地,那些大福德的天神,不仅能了知自己于过去生所造之业,也能了知其他某些福业,故言「凡大福德者(ye mahāpuññā)」等。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitā evāti buddhisampannā eva devatā. Yathā devatā sampatijātā ‘‘kīdisena puññakammena idha nibbattā’’ti cintetvā ‘‘iminā nāma puññakammena idha nibbattā’’ti jānanti, evaṃ atītabhave attanā kataṃ, aññadāpi vā ekaccaṃ puññakammaṃ jānantiyeva mahāpuññāti āha ‘‘ye mahāpuññā’’tiādi.
因其寿命极为长远,故众生不显现(paññāyanti)。「非导出的」(aniyyānikanti):即不能导向出离,以众生非为法器故。并非众生寿命极长,而是恶行增盛,故说「此时众生烦恼增盛」(tadā hi sattā ussannakilesā hontī)。此处有问:何以正自觉者唯出现于人界,而不出现于天界或梵天界?首先,不出现于天界,因彼处无梵行之住所,亦非稀奇之故。佛陀世尊为稀有之法,此稀有法性若依天身安住,则不若人间明显。若见天身模样的正自觉者,世人将以佛之威神力归为天神力,不归为佛之威神力;如是,则不能确信「此为正自觉者」,不生净信,不舍「有主宰神」之执见;又由天身可长久住立,有人便不能离一分常住论。不出于梵天界,其理亦然。正为令众生脱离他们执取,佛陀世尊唯降生人善趣,而非天善趣。纵降生人善趣,亦非化生。若化生,则上述过失不能除,且为安立应受教化众生于法轨中。显示巴利原文
Na paññāyanti ciratarakālattā paramāyuno. Aniyyānikanti na niyyānāvahaṃ sattānaṃ abhājanabhāvato. Sattā na paramāyuno honti nāma pāpussannatāyāti āha ‘‘tadā hi sattā ussannakilesā hontī’’ti. Etthāha – kasmā sammāsambuddhā manussaloke eva uppajjanti, na devabrahmalokesūti? Devaloke tāva nuppajjanti brahmacariyavāsassa anokāsabhāvato, tathā anacchariyabhāvato . Acchariyadhammā hi buddhā bhagavanto, tesaṃ sā acchariyadhammatā devattabhāve ṭhitānaṃ na pākaṭā hoti yathā manussabhūtānaṃ, devabhūte hi sammāsambuddhe dissamānaṃ buddhānubhāvaṃ devānubhāvato loko dahati, na buddhānubhāvato, tathā sati ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti nādhimuccati na sampasīdati, issaraguttaggāhaṃ na vissajjeti, devattabhāvassa ca cirakālādhiṭṭhānato ekaccasassatavādato na parimuccati. Brahmaloke nuppajjantīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sattānaṃ tādisaggāhavinimocanatthañhi buddhā bhagavanto manussasugatiyaṃyeva uppajjanti, na devasugatiyaṃ. Manussasugatiyaṃ uppajjantāpi opapātikā na honti, sati ca opapātikūpapattiyaṃ vuttadosānativattanato, dhammaveneyyānaṃ dhammatantiyā ṭhapanassa viya dhātuveneyyānaṃ dhātūnaṃ ṭhapanassa icchitabbattā ca. Na hi opapātikānaṃ parinibbānato uddhaṃ sarīradhātuyo tiṭṭhanti. Manussaloke uppajjantāpi mahābodhisattā carimabhave manussabhāvassa pākaṭabhāvakaraṇāya pana dārapariggahampi karontā yāva puttamukhadassanā agāramajjhe tiṭṭhanti, paripākagatasīlanekkhammapaññādipāramikāpi na abhinikkhamantīti. Kiṃ vā etāya kāraṇacintāya ‘‘sabbabuddhehi āciṇṇasamāciṇṇā, yadidaṃ manussabhūtānaṃyeva abhisambujjhanā, na devabhūtāna’’nti. Ayamettha dhammatā. Tathā hi tadattho mahābhinīhāropi manussabhūtānaṃyeva ijjhati, na devabhūtānaṃ.
那么,正自觉者为什么只出现在赡部洲,而不出现在其余洲呢?有些人认为:‘由于大地之脐、依佛力而不动的菩提道场唯在赡部洲,故佛唯降生于此。’也有人说:‘因为其余不可舍弃之处也唯有在此处方可获得。’然而,对此问题,我们信受如下的解释:过去诸佛、大菩萨、独觉佛的降生,声闻、菩萨的大誓愿,以及声闻波罗蜜的积集与成熟,全部都只在以佛土为性质的此轮围界中的赡部洲成就,于他处则不能。而且,佛陀出世的目的正是为了调伏众生,这是以观察上首弟子、大弟子等特别应度化者为前提的,因此佛陀唯降生于赡部洲,不生其余洲。这一规律,亦是一切佛陀所共行的。应知这些上人唯降生出世于此,便如同成就之辐一般,彼此作为助缘,前前后后相续不绝。正因如此,也显示了以此轮围为中心,连同周围一万个轮围界,皆属佛陀的教化区域,因为在三藏佛语中,从未提及此外另有佛陀应化的地方。故有偈颂云:‘佛不出世于三洲,唯在赡部洲出生’,并可见于此。依此道理,关于教法的限定,亦应推究其因而加以说明。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana sammāsambuddhā jambudīpe eva uppajjanti, na sesadīpesu? Keci tāva āhu ‘‘yasmā pathaviyā nābhibhūtā, buddhānubhāvasahitā acalaṭṭhānabhūtā bodhimaṇḍabhūmi jambudīpe eva, tasmā jambudīpe eva uppajjantī’’ti, tathā ‘‘itaresampi avijahitaṭṭhānānaṃ tattheva labbhanato’’ti. Ayaṃ panettha amhākaṃ khanti – yasmā purimabuddhānaṃ, mahābodhisattānaṃ, paccekabuddhānañca nibbattiyā sāvakabodhisattānaṃ sāvakabodhiyā abhinīhāro, sāvakapāramiyā sambharaṇaṃ, paripācanañca buddhakhettabhūte imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe jambudīpe eva ijjhati, na aññattha. Veneyyānaṃ vinayanattho ca buddhuppādoti aggasāvakamahāsāvakādi veneyyavisesāpekkhāya etasmiṃ jambudīpe eva buddhā nibbattanti, na sesadīpesu. Ayañca nayo sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇoti. Tesaṃ uttamapurisānaṃ tattheva uppatti sampatticakkānaṃ viya aññamaññūpanissayato aparāparaṃ vattatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, eteneva imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ majjhe katvā iminā saddhiṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ dasasahassasseva khettabhāvo dīpito ito aññassa buddhānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānassa tepiṭake buddhavacane anupalabbhanato. Tenāha ‘‘tīsu dīpesu buddhā na nibbattanti, jambudīpeyeva nibbattantīti dīpaṃ passī’’ti. Iminā nayena desaniyāmepi kāraṇaṃ nīharitvā vattabbaṃ.
此时,因刹帝利族为世间公认尊贵,连婆罗门亦应供养,故他观察族姓。他察见‘父将为王’(rājā pitā bhavissatī),因为应当依父亲这一方来指称其家族。显示巴利原文
Idānica khattiyakulaṃ lokasammataṃ brāhmaṇānampi pūjanīyabhāvato. ‘‘Rājā pitā bhavissatī’’ti kulaṃ passi pituvasena kulassa niddisitabbato.
他见‘十个月又七天’(dasannaṃ māsānaṃ upari satta divasānī),由此了知自己无有障碍,而彼将往兜率天享受天界的胜妙受用。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dasannaṃ māsānaṃ upari satta divasānī’’ti passi, tena attano antarāyābhāvaṃ aññāsi, tassā ca tusitabhave dibbasampattipaccanubhavanaṃ.
“此天众”即指一万轮围界的天众。问:当时,那些天众如何了知菩萨的波罗蜜已经圆满,又如何了知他已成就佛位?答:依仗大威力天众之力,且那些天众多能证得现观。也正因如此,在分施法施时,世尊座下屡屡有一万轮围界天众云集。显示巴利原文
Tā devatāti dasasahassicakkavāḷadevatā. Kathaṃ pana tā devatā tadā bodhisattassa pūritapāramibhāvaṃ, kathaṃ cassa buddhabhāvaṃ jānantīti? Mahesakkhānaṃ devatānaṃ vasena, yebhuyyena ca tā devatā abhisamayabhāgino. Tathā hi bhagavato dhammadānasaṃvibhāge anekavāraṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatāsannipāto ahosi.
「了知『我将死』」:由于在临近死亡的速行中,与智相应的速行现起时,已觉知到死亡逼近的状态,因而能了知。但死心则不了知,因为死心刹那极为短暂。同样,死心也不属「死与结生智」的范畴。对于结生心,此理亦然。「转向之次第」:指转向的次序。因为仅凭一次转向不能确定所缘,故对同一所缘作第二次、第三次转向方能确定。此处以转向为首而取速行路。因此说「他将于第二、第三心路了知」。因为在死亡前的诸心路中,已了知「我即将死去」,所以说「于死刹那亦了知『我将死』」。然而,结生是前所未有的状态,故不在结生心上了知。当喜好生起之后,方了知「我于某处结生」。「于彼时」:即结生之时。「十千世界震动」:此处震动的原因,已在《梵网经》注(《长部注》1.149)中说明;而在义理上应说之内容,将于后面《大般涅槃经》注(《长部注》2.171)中广释。大悲的诸佛世尊,以安排众生利益与安乐为事,多数时安住于悦俱,因此他们以第一广大果报心结生,此在注释书(《长部注》2.17...显示巴利原文
‘‘Cavāmī’’ti jānāti cutiāsannajavanehi ñāṇasahitehi cutiyā upaṭṭhitabhāvassa paṭisaṃviditattā. Cuticittaṃ na jānāti cuticittakkhaṇassa ittarabhāvato. Tathā hi taṃ cutūpapātañāṇassapi avisayova. Paṭisandhicittepi eseva nayo. Āvajjanapariyāyoti āvajjanakkamo. Yasmā ekavāraṃ āvajjitamattena ārammaṇaṃ nicchinituṃ na sakkā, tasmā taṃ evārammaṇaṃ dutiyaṃ, tatiyañca āvajjitvā nicchayati. Āvajjanasīsena cettha javanavāro gahito. Tenāha ‘‘dutiyatatiyacittavāre eva jānissatī’’ti. Cutiyā puretaraṃ katipayacittavārato paṭṭhāya ‘‘maraṇaṃ me āsanna’’nti jānanato ‘‘cutikkhaṇepi cavāmīti jānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭisandhiyā pana apubbabhāvato paṭisandhicittaṃ na jānāti. Nikantiyā uppattito parato ‘‘asukasmiṃ me ṭhāne paṭisandhi gahitā’’ti jānāti. Tasmiṃ kāleti paṭisandhiggahaṇakāle. Dasasahassilokadhātu kampatīti ettha kampanakāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā brahmajālavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.149) vuttameva. Atthato panettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato mahāparinibbānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.171) āgamissati. Mahākāruṇikā buddhā bhagavanto sattānaṃ hitasukhavidhānatapparatāya bahulaṃ somanassikāva hontīti tesaṃ paṭhamamahāvipākacittena paṭisandhiggahaṇaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.17; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 498; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 4.200) vuttaṃ. Mahāsivattheropana yadipi mahākāruṇikā buddhā bhagavanto sattānaṃ hitasukhavidhānatapparāva, vivekajjhāsayā pana visaṅkhāraninnā sabbasaṅkhāresu ajjhupekkhanabahulāti pañcamamahāvipākacittena paṭisandhiggahaṇamāha.
「从满月前第七天起」:即从满月前第七天开始,意谓白分第九天开始。「第七天」:即从第九天算起的第七天,为阿沙阇月满月日。「此梦」:即如今所说的梦境。《中部注》中说:「诸天将菩萨带到阿耨达池,立于一旁。然后,诸天的天女们前来,为菩萨沐浴,去除人间垢秽。」其中「诸天的天女」指四大王天的天女们。「游行」:于行境游历之后。显示巴利原文
Pure puṇṇamāya sattamadivasato paṭṭhāyāti puṇṇamāya pure sattamadivasato paṭṭhāya, sukkapakkhe navamito paṭṭhāyāti attho. Sattame divaseti navamito sattame divase āsaḷhipuṇṇamāyaṃ. Idaṃ supinanti idāni vuccamānākāraṃ. Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘anotattadahaṃ netvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsu. Atha nesaṃ deviyo āgantvā manussamalaharaṇatthaṃ nhāpetvā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 4.200) vuttaṃ. Tattha nesaṃ deviyoti mahārājūnaṃ deviyo. Caritvāti gocaraṃ caritvā.
“涂以鲜牛粪”:以新鲜牛粪涂抹装饰过的地面。“那将是男胎,非女胎,你将得子”:那些婆罗门仅凭自己的解梦术这样说。至于“若彼将居家”等语,则是被天神附体,如实开示其义。显示巴利原文
Haritūpalittāyāti haritena gomayena kataparibhaṇḍāya. ‘‘So ca kho purisagabbho, na itthigabbho, putto te bhavissatī’’ti ettakameva te brāhmaṇā attano supinasatthanayena kathesuṃ. ‘‘Sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasissatī’’tiādi pana devatāviggahena tamatthaṃ yāthāvato pavedesuṃ.
“法性”:此处“法”字,如同在“诸比丘,有生法的众生”等句中,是“自然”的意思。法即是法性,如同天即是天众,故说“此是自性”,意思是此是本性。而这自性,在义理上即是如此决定的状态,故说“这便是说为决定”。显示巴利原文
Dhammatāti ettha dhamma-saddo ‘‘jātidhammānaṃ bhikkhave sattāna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.131; 3.373; paṭi. ma. 1.33) viya pakatipariyāyo, dhammo eva dhammatā yathā devo eva devatāti āha ‘‘ayaṃ sabhāvo’’ti, ayaṃ pakatīti attho. Svāyaṃ sabhāvo atthato tathā niyatabhāvoti āha ‘‘ayaṃ niyāmoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Niyāmo pana bahuvidhoti te sabbe atthuddhāranayena uddharitvā idhādhippetaniyāmameva dassetuṃ ‘‘niyāmo ca nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kammānaṃ niyāmo kammaniyāmo. Esa nayo utuniyāmādīsu tīsu. Itaro pana dhammo eva niyāmo dhammaniyāmo, dhammatā.
指善业。磨砺:使其变得锋利。显示巴利原文
Kusalassa kammassa. Nisento tikhiṇaṃ karonto.
由于无色界等地界差别的缘故,能见到时节上的差异;对于依时节差异而成就的树木等的开花结果,以「于彼彼地方」加以分别而说。「于彼彼时」:即在各个不同的春季等时节。显示巴利原文
Arūpādibhūmibhāgavisesavasena utuvisesadassanato utuvisesena sijjhamānānaṃ rukkhādīnaṃ pupphaphalādiggahaṇaṃ ‘‘tesu tesu janapadesū’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāleti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vasantādikāle.
从甘甜的种子而生起甘甜,从苦涩的种子而生起苦涩——应如此联结其义。显示巴利原文
Madhurato bījato tittato bījatoti yojanā.
18 「进入」:因为于接近现在时,可以如同现在一样表达,所以说「正在进入」即此义,也就是「已进入」。如此,当依此所说方式而有正知。这并非是在正在进入的结生刹那,因为结生刹那极难辨了。正如文中所说:「不了知结生心。」再者,以十千轮围的展布故,为无量;以极其闪耀的状态故,为殊胜。天神的神力,即诸天的光明威德。因为那光明超过了诸天的光明,而非超过了他们的威权。所以说「犹如披着鲜洁衣」等。显示巴利原文
18. Vattamānasamīpe vattamāne viya voharitabbanti ‘‘okkamatī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘okkanto hotīti ayamevattho’’ti. Evaṃ hotīti evaṃ vuttappakārenassa sampajānanā hoti. Na okkamamāne paṭisandhikkhaṇassa duviññeyyatāya. Yathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭisandhicittaṃ na jānātī’’ti. Dasasahassacakkavāḷapattharaṇena vā appamāṇo. Ativiya samujjalanabhāvena uḷāro. Devānubhāvanti devānaṃ pabhānubhāvaṃ. Devānañhi pabhaṃ so obhāso abhibhavati, na tesaṃ ādhipaccaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nivatthavatthassā’’tiādi.
世界与各个世界之间的空隙,称为“世界间”;由于此词以阴性形式表达,故称“世界中间地狱”。其中没有树木、灌木等障碍,因此“无碍”、不拥挤,经文故说“常开敞”。“不被覆盖”,是指下方与上方均无任何遮盖,故经文说“下方也无依托”。此处的“pi”字,既表示世界中间地狱如下方未覆盖水的大地一般不被覆盖,也表示其上方不像轮围山那样有天宫,因此它不被覆盖、无有依托。因彼处有黑暗,故称“黑暗”。由于没有光明,眼识不会生起,而非因为没有眼睛。正如经文所说:“以此光明相互辨认”。在赡部洲正午时,东毗提诃的居民因日落能见半个日轮,西牛货洲的居民因日出也能见半个日轮;其余两洲也是如此,因而说“三洲同时俱能看见”。若非如此,则只有两洲能同时看见。每一方各散灭九万由旬的黑暗,也应如此理解。由于它的光芒不能充分照及,即无法以自身光明遍照。又因它在与持双山等高的虚空中运行,所以经文说“在轮围山正中游走”。显示巴利原文
Lokānaṃ lokadhātūnaṃ antaro vivaro lokantaro, so eva itthiliṅgavasena ‘‘lokantarikā’’ti vutto. Rukkhagacchādinā kenaci na haññantīti aghā, asambādhā. Tenāha ‘‘niccavivaṭā’’ti. Asaṃvutāti heṭṭhā, upari ca kenaci na pihitā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhāpi appatiṭṭhā’’ti. Tattha pi-saddena yathā heṭṭhā udakassa pidhāyikā pathavī natthīti asaṃvutā lokantarikā, evaṃ uparipi cakkavāḷesu viya devavimānānaṃ abhāvato asaṃvutā appatiṭṭhāti dasseti. Andhakāro ettha atthīti andhakārā. Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ na jāyati ālokassa abhāvato, na cakkhuno. Tathā hi ‘‘tena obhāsena aññamaññaṃ sañjānantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Jambudīpe ṭhitamajjhanhikavelāyaṃ pubbavidehavāsīnaṃ atthaṅgamanavasena upaḍḍhaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāyati, aparagoyānavāsīnaṃ uggamanavasena, evaṃ sesadīpesu pīti āha ‘‘ekappahāreneva tīsu dīpesu paññāyantī’’ti. Ito aññathā pana dvīsu eva dīpesu ekappahārena paññāyantīti. Ekekāya disāya nava nava yojanasatasahassāni andhakāravidhamanampi imināva nayena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pabhāya nappahontīti attano pabhāya obhāsituṃ anabhisambhunanti. Yugandharapabbatappamāṇe ākāse vicaraṇato ‘‘cakkavāḷapabbatassa vemajjhena vicarantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“急切”:指为了吃东西正要伸手去抓取。“翻转”:即倒转过来。“断除”:指从昏厥之处挣脱,或肢体、关节被折断而分裂。“极咸之水”:此处可能是说,因无烈日灼热而极为寒冷,故以“极咸”来形容。其实劫初凝结的水,既不像成就暴雨时支撑大地的倾盆大雨,也不像坏劫的水,本来不咸。若它那么咸,连大地也会融化。又或者是饿鬼的恶业之力,使水对他们显现如脓血一般,那时水便转为咸涩,因此经文说“在极咸的水中”。显示巴利原文
Vāvaṭāti khādanatthaṃ gaṇhituṃ upakkamantā. Viparivattitvāti vivattitvā. Chijjitvāti mucchāpattiyā ṭhitaṭṭhānato muccitvā, aṅgapaccaṅgachedanena vā chijjitvā. Accantakhāreti ātapasantāpābhāvena atisītabhāvameva sandhāya accantakhāratā vuttā siyā. Na hi taṃ kappasaṇṭhahanaudakaṃ sampattikaramahāmeghavuṭṭhaṃ pathavisandhārakaṃ kappavināsakaṃ udakaṃ viya khāraṃ bhavituṃ arahati. Tathā hi sati pathavīpi vilīyeyya, tesaṃ vā pāpakammabalena petānaṃ udakassa pubbakheḷabhāvāpatti viya tassa udakassa tadā khārabhāvāpatti hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘accantakhāre udake’’ti.
“即仅饮一匙之粥”:指用滤器之类从钵等容器中取出粥,仅喝一口的时间。“从各方面”:指从所有角度来说,六种情况也皆如此。显示巴利原文
Ekayāgupānamattampīti pattādibhājanagataṃ yāguṃ gaḷociādiuddharaṇiyā gahetvā pivanamattampi kālaṃ. Samantatoti sabbabhāgato chappakārampi.
19 “以四大王之力”:这是以多闻天王等四大天王的共同身份而言。显示巴利原文
19.Catunnaṃmahārājānaṃ vasenāti vessavaṇādicatumahārājabhāvasāmaññena.
“随其住处”(Yathāvihāraṃ):即各随其所在的住处。显示巴利原文
Yathāvihāranti yathāsakaṃ vihāraṃ.
20 “依本性”:即依自己的本性。因此说“以自体”。不依靠从他人处领受,仅凭自己的本性,便能自发觉立而戒行具足。“菩萨之母也是如此”:即我们这位菩萨的母亲也是如此。“如同在迦罗迦仙人处”:就像在迦罗迦仙人那里,在其他时候会(为孩子)领受戒律,但就菩萨而言……菩萨是自己受持戒律的,毘婆尸菩萨的母亲也是同样的情况——正是这个意思。显示巴利原文
20.Pakatiyāti attano pakatiyā eva. Tenāha ‘‘sabhāvenevā’’ti. Parassa santike gahaṇena vinā attano sabhāveneva sayameva adhiṭṭhahitvā sīlasampannā. Bodhisattamātāpīti amhākaṃ bodhisattamātāpi. Kāladevilassāti yathā kāladevilassa santike aññadā gaṇhāti, bodhisatte pana…pe… sayameva sīlaṃ aggahesi, tathā vipassībodhisattamātāpīti adhippāyo.
21 “于诸人”:这是依循本性习惯而说的,意思是“对名为人类的女子而言,对人类男子可能生起以男子为目标的心念”。然而,菩萨的母亲即使对天人,也绝不会生起那样的心念。正如凭借菩萨的威力,菩萨的母亲不会生起以男子为目标的心念;同样,正是凭借菩萨的威力,她才不会被任何男子所征服,所以说“双脚无法动弹,如同被天锁绑住了一般”。显示巴利原文
21.‘‘Manussesū’’ti idaṃ pakaticārittavasena vuttaṃ, ‘‘manussitthiyā nāma manussapurisesu purisādhippāyacittaṃ uppajjeyyā’’ti. Bodhisattassa mātuyā pana devesupi tādisaṃ cittaṃ nuppajjateva. Yathā bodhisattassa ānubhāvena bodhisattamātu purisādhippāyacittaṃ nuppajjati, evaṃ tassa ānubhāveneva sā kenaci purisena anabhibhavanīyāti āha ‘‘pādā na vahanti dibbasaṅkhalikā viya bajjhantī’’ti.
22 前面说过“与五种欲相应的心念不会生起”,后面却又说“成就、具足五种欲而受用”。这为何不相互矛盾呢?为说明这一点,所以说“先前……”等。“遮止事”:指遮止非梵行之事。因此说“依于对男子的意图”。“获得所缘”:指仅仅获得了色等五种欲的所缘,而非指非梵行。显示巴利原文
22. Pubbe ‘‘kāmaguṇūpasaṃhitaṃ cittaṃ nuppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ, puna ‘‘pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricāretī’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Kathamidaṃ aññamaññaṃ na virujjhatīti āha ‘‘pubbe’’tiādi. Vatthupaṭikkhepoti abrahmacariyavatthupaṭisedho. Tenāha ‘‘purisādhippāyavasenā’’ti. Ārammaṇapaṭilābhoti rūpādipañcakāmaguṇārammaṇasseva paṭilābho.
23 “疲惫”:指倦怠。那时,她身体的沉重、僵硬等状态也绝不会出现。“她见到在胎内的(菩萨)”:这是说,她能看见在胎内的(菩萨)。那么,是从何时开始看见的呢?回答说:“在越过羯罗蓝等阶段之后……。”“看见”这句话本身就说明了其作用。由于在羯罗蓝等阶段还不具备那种能见性,所以那时不能见到。“与幼小、稚弱、仰卧的儿子一起。”“那名为母亲者……”等,是依循通常的行为方式而说的。转轮王的胎儿尚且受到特别的保护,而菩萨的胎儿更因其功德资粮极为殊胜,获得了更为特殊的保护。因此,菩萨的母亲成为在饮食与威仪上极其适宜之人,并恭敬地保护胎儿。“为了安乐住”:指为了菩萨的安乐而住。“面向东方”:指面向母亲身体的前方。现在,为了显示在胎内者能被看见的内外原因,而说:“前生所造之业……。”“她”:指那位天后。“处”:指腹部。如同水晶、云层等通透一般,由于菩萨母亲腹部皮肤极为单薄的特性,光明畅行无碍。正如菩萨的母亲能看见腹中的菩萨那样,菩萨是否也能同样看见母亲,以及站在前方的其他色法呢?回答是否定的,因此说“然而菩萨”。显示巴利原文
23.Kilamathoti khedo, kāyassa garubhāvakathinabhāvādayopi tassā tadā na honti eva. ‘‘Tirokucchigataṃ passatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kadā paṭṭhāya passatīti āha ‘‘kalalādikālaṃ atikkamitvā’’tiādi. Dassane payojanaṃ sayameva vadati. Tassa abhāvato kalalādikāle na passati. Puttena daharena mandena uttānaseyyakena saddhiṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ taṃ mātū’’tiādi pakaticārittavasena vuttaṃ. Cakkavattigabbhatopi hi savisesaṃ bodhisattagabbho parihāraṃ labhati puññasambhārassa sātisayattā, tasmā bodhisattamātā ativiya sappāyāhārācārā ca hutvā sakkaccaṃ pariharati. Sukhavāsatthanti bodhisattassa sukhavāsatthaṃ. Puratthābhimukhoti mātu purimabhāgābhimukho. Idāni tirokucchigatassa dissamānatāya abbhantaraṃ, bāhirañca kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pubbe katakamma’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Assāti deviyā. Vatthunti kucchiṃ. Phalikaabbhapaṭalādino viya bodhisattamātukucchitacassa patanubhāvena ālokassa vibandhābhāvato yathā bodhisattamātā kucchigataṃ bodhisattaṃ passati, kiṃ evaṃ bodhisattopi mātaraṃ, aññañca purato ṭhitaṃ rūpagataṃ passati, noti āha ‘‘bodhisatto panā’’tiādi. Kasmā pana sati cakkhumhi, āloke ca na passatīti āha ‘‘na hi antokucchiyaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjatī’’ti. Assāsapassāsā viya hi tattha cakkhuviññāṇampi na uppajjati tajjassa samannāhārassa abhāvato.
24 如同其他女子由于分娩的缘故,被那样严重的疾病所侵袭乃至死亡;然而,当菩萨在母胎中时,菩萨之母并不因此出现分娩的征兆,也无任何疾病生起,她仅仅是寿尽而终。这个道理,前面已说过了。「因为是由菩萨所居住过的处所……」等语,是说明其缘由。「他人不可受用」:即不应由他人受用,意为不适合受用。倘若如此,菩萨之父便应当有另一位正后了。可是,这在菩萨之母仍在世时,并不合理,故而说「也不能」等语。「除去」:指从正后的位置逐离之后。「因对自身的贪爱,故而向外寻求所缘」:为了表明「有情对诸欲境的爱著,其强大的根源正是对自身的贪爱」,而如此说:「有情对于自身,贪爱是极为强烈的。」「不能妥善保护」:指不能致力于正确的孕期保养。因此,胎儿便多有疾患。「处所变得清净」:指子宫变得洁净。关于菩萨在母亲年龄中期的第三阶段入胎一事,其实这也包含在「观察她的寿命」这一考量之中,因为这能避免因年龄而可能产生的变化。而由于女性生理特性所可能产生的不适,则由于菩萨的威力而得以平息。显示巴利原文
24. Yathā aññā itthiyo vijātappaccayā tādisena rogena abhibhūtāpi hutvā maranti, bodhisattamātu pana bodhisatte kucchigate tassa vijāyananimittaṃ, na koci rogo uppajjati, kevalaṃ āyuparikkhayeneva kālaṃ karoti, svāyamattho heṭṭhā vutto eva. ‘‘Bodhisattena vasitaṭṭhānañhī’’tiādi tassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Aññesaṃ aparibhoganti aññehi na paribhuñjitabbaṃ, na paribhogayogyanti attho. Tathā sati bodhisattapitu aññāya aggamahesiyā bhavitabbaṃ, tathāpi bodhisattamātari dharantiyā ayujjamānakanti āha ‘‘na ca sakkā’’tiādi. Apanetvāti aggamahesiṭhānato nīharitvā. Attani chandarāgavaseneva bahiddhā ārammaṇapariyesanāti visayinisārāgo sattānaṃ visayesu sārāgassa balavakāraṇanti dassento āha ‘‘sattānaṃ attabhāve chandarāgo balavā hotī’’ti. Anurakkhituṃ na sakkotīti sammā gabbhaparihāraṃ nānuyuñjati. Tena gabbho bahvābādho hoti. Vatthu visadaṃ hotīti gabbhāsayo visuddho hoti. Mātu majjhimavayassa tatiyakoṭṭhāse bodhisattagabbhokkamanampi tassā āyuparimāṇavilokaneneva saṅgahitaṃ vayovasena uppajjanakavikārassa parivajjanato. Itthisabhāvena uppajjanakavikāro pana bodhisattassa ānubhāveneva vūpasamati.
25 「七月生者」:指从结生算起,于第七个月出生的人。他因身体极其柔弱,不能忍受寒热。至于八月生者,虽然在智力和体格上或许优于七月生者,但他身体某些部位的皮肤在成长过程中不耐摩擦,因此难以存活。然而,有论师这样说:「七月生者,那些部位的皮肤还尚未长成那样单薄。」显示巴利原文
25.Sattamāsajātoti paṭisandhiggahaṇato sattame māse jāto. So sītuṇhakkhamo na hoti ativiya sukhumālatāya. Aṭṭhamāsajāto kāmaṃ sattamāsajātato buddhivayavā, ekacce pana cammapadesā vuddhiṃ pāpuṇantā ghaṭṭanaṃ na sahanti, tena so na jīvati. ‘‘Sattamāsajātassa pana na tāva te jātā’’ti vadanti.
27 「诸天首先接取」:净居天的梵天神们——那些诸漏已尽者,怀着「我们应当自己首先接取这位世间庇护者、大人」这样的恭敬与推崇,为表达自身的喜悦,最先接取了菩萨。「化作接生妇的样子」:指化现为照顾产妇的助产士的样子。「一派」:指无畏山寺派的住众。就皮肤而言,说菩萨诞生时如同鱼眼般洁净。菩萨的母亲站立着,既不坐下,也不躺卧。因此说:「菩萨之母是站立着生出菩萨的。」由于没有任何痛苦,她是以站立之姿顺利生产的。其他女子则因分娩的痛苦极其剧烈,不堪忍受,要么坐着,要么躺着才能生产。显示巴利原文
27.Devāpaṭhamaṃ paṭiggaṇhantīti ‘‘lokanāthaṃ mahāpurisaṃ sayameva paṭhamaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmā’’ti sañjātagāravabahumānā attano pītiṃ pavedentā khīṇāsavā suddhāvāsabrahmāno ādito paṭiggaṇhanti. Sūtivesanti sūtijagganadhātivesaṃ. Eketi abhayagirivāsino. Macchakkhisadisaṃ chavivasena. Aṭṭhāsi na nisīdi, na nipajji vā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhitāva bodhisattaṃ bodhisattamātā vijāyatī’’ti. Niddukkhatāya ṭhitā eva hutvā vijāyati. Dukkhassa hi balavabhāvato taṃ dukkhaṃ asahamānā aññā itthiyo nisinnā vā nipannā vā vijāyanti.
28 「皮革席」:指用兽皮缝制而成的席子。「大神力」:指具有巨大的威力。「大名声」:指眷属众多,并享有显赫的声望与赞誉。显示巴利原文
28.Ajinappaveṇiyāti ajinacammehi sibbitvā katapaveṇiyā. Mahātejoti mahānubhāvo. Mahāyasoti mahāparivāro, vipulakittighoso ca.
29 「碎片状」:因为从逼仄的处所出来,其形态显得支离破碎,犹如碎片,以此显示其不清净的状态。「不黏着」:指在子宫内及产道等任何处所,都毫无黏着、毫不附着,因此说「犹如水从风箱中流出一般」。「以水」:指借着子宫内的羊水。「不受沾染地出来」:因为该处没有会导致沾染的水、痰等杂物。事实上,从菩萨结生的那一刻起,由于他福德威力的缘故,那胎藏之处原本就已清净,尤其就像一间最上等的香室,持续散发着栴檀的香气。显示巴利原文
29.Bhaggavibhaggāti sambādhaṭṭhānato nikkhamanena vibhāvitattā bhaggā, vibhaggā viya ca hutvā, tena nesaṃ avisadabhāvameva dasseti. Alaggo hutvāti gabbhāsaye, yonipadese ca katthaci alaggo asatto hutvā, yato ‘‘dhamakaraṇato udakanikkhamanasadisa’’nti vuttaṃ. Udakenāti gabbhāsayagatena udakena. Amakkhitova nikkhamati sammakkhitassa tādisassa udakasemhādikasseva tattha abhāvato. Bodhisattassa hi puññānubhāvato paṭisandhiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya taṃ ṭhānaṃ pubbepi visuddhaṃ visesato paramasugandhagandhakuṭi viya candanagandhaṃ vāyantaṃ tiṭṭhati.
「水团」:即大量的水。显示巴利原文
Udakavaṭṭiyoti udakakkhandhā.
31 「瞬间生」:指在片刻间出生,仅存在一刹那。「随顺地被带领时」:指顺着方向被引导而去时。「已来到」:指那些装饰已到达了那处。「多分支」:指由宝石所成、具有成百上千个支撑点的装饰物。「千圆轮」:指安置于那些装饰之上、有着成千上万个圆环的装饰物。「Marū」意为诸天。然而,不应如此看待,因为菩萨在迈步之前,已先行观察四方。因此说:「大士……」等。「成为一广场」:由于开阔通畅,变得如同寺院内庭及周边广场般空旷无障碍。「相似者尚且无有」:像你们这样的观察,往往只在殊胜者身上才能见到,所以他们对菩萨说:「在这里,连与你们相似的人都没有,更何况是超越的呢?」「最上」:即最尊贵、最首要的。那么,菩萨凭何成为最上?答:「凭其功德。」在此,「第一」正是「最上」的同义词。而菩萨的最上性独一无二,不与他人共,故说「一切最上」,意为于一切众生中最为尊上。「Etasseva」即指此「最上」之词。以上,那些具大威力的天神如此说,那么其余的天神又怎么说呢?显示巴利原文
31.Muhuttajātoti muhuttena jāto hutvā muhuttamattova. Anudhāriyamāneti anukūlavasena nīyamāne. Āgatānevāti taṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatāni eva. Anekasākhanti ratanamayānekasatapatiṭṭhānahīrakaṃ. Sahassamaṇḍalanti tesaṃ upariṭṭhitaṃ anekasahassamaṇḍalahīrakaṃ. Marūti devā. Na kho panaevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ padavītihārato pageva disāvilokanassa katattā. Tenāha ‘‘mahāsatto hī’’tiādi. Ekaṅgaṇānīti vivaṭabhāvena vihāraṅgaṇapariveṇaṅgaṇāni viya ekaṅgaṇasadisāni ahesuṃ. Sadisopi natthīti tumhākaṃ idaṃ vilokanaṃ visiṭṭhe passituṃ ‘‘idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Aggoti padhāno, kena panassa padhānatāti āha ‘‘guṇehī’’ti. Paṭhama-saddo cettha padhānapariyāyo. Bodhisattassa pana padhānatā anaññasādhāraṇāti āha ‘‘sabbapaṭhamo’’ti, sabbapadhānoti attho. Etassevāti aggasaddasseva. Ettha ca mahesakkhā tāva devā tathā ca vadanti, itare pana kathanti? Mahāsattassa ānubhāvadassanādinā. Mahesakkhānañhi devānaṃ mahāsattassa ānubhāvo viya tena sadisānampi ānubhāvo paccakkho ahosīti, itare pana tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā saddahantā anuminantā tathā āhaṃsu. Paripākagatapubbahetusaṃsiddhāya dhammatāya codiyamāno imasmiṃ…pe… byākāsi.
为了阐明菩萨初生时的「站立」等相,是哪一些未来殊胜证得的前行相,而说「在此……」等。其中,「站立」是证得四神足的前行相,因为借着神足之力,能于出世间法中获得善巧安立。「面朝北方」是度越世间而行的前行相,世尊由此征服了包括天神在内的整个世间,而不被任何所征服。故有说:「这是压倒大众、征服大众而行的前行相。」同样,「七步行走」是具足七觉支、行于圣道的前行相。「持纯净白伞」是持清净解脱白伞的前行相。「五王者之物的结合」是五种解脱功德结合的前行相。「无碍观察四方」是无碍智的前行相。「宣说『我是最上』等无畏语」,是无人能障碍、转动法轮的前行相。「宣称『这是最后生』」,是未来不再受生……的前行相。应知,对于未来应得的殊胜,这些相是不虚的。「未说」指此经中未曾说,他处所载的次第也未提及。「应引证」:应引证诸经与注疏中所出现的方法来阐明。显示巴利原文
Jātamattasseva bodhisattassa ṭhānādīni yesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhūtānīti te niddhāretvā dassento ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha patiṭṭhānaṃ caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ iddhipādavasena lokuttaradhammesu suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasamijjhanato. Uttarābhimukhabhāvo lokassa uttaraṇavasena gamanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Tena hi bhagavā sadevakassa lokassa abhibhūto, kenaci anabhibhūto ahosi. Tenāha ‘‘mahājanaṃ ajjhottharitvā abhibhavitvā gamanassa pubbanimitta’’nti. Tathā sattapadagamanaṃ sattapadabojjhaṅgasampannaariyamaggagamanassa. Suvisuddhasetacchattadhāraṇaṃ suvisuddhavimuttichattadhāraṇassa. Pañcarājakakudhabhaṇḍasamāyogo pañcavidhavimuttiguṇasamāyogassa. Anāvaṭadisānuvilokanaṃ anāvaṭañāṇatāya. ‘‘Aggohamasmī’’tiādinā achambhitavācābhāsanaṃ kenaci avibandhanīyatāya appavattiyassa saddhammacakkappavattanassa. ‘‘Ayamantimā jātī’’ti āyatiṃ jātiyā abhāvakittanā anupādi…pe… pubbanimittanti veditabbaṃ tassa tassa anāgate laddhabbavisesassa taṃ taṃ nimittaṃ abyabhicārīti katvā. Na āgatoti imasmiṃ sutte, aññattha ca vakkhamānāya anupubbiyā na āgato. Āharitvāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte, aṭṭhakathāsu ca āgatanayena āharitvā dīpetabbo.
「十千世界震动」这句话,虽在本文中已经出现,但为指出接下来要说的诸神变之根本而再次述及,其他类似情况也应如此看待。像以弦绷起的琵琶、以皮绷起的鼓,这些仅是五支乐器的举例;或者由「ca」字亦可含摄其余乐器。他们说:「脚镣等在那瞬间断裂,随后又恢复原状;同样地,先天盲人的眼根、耳根等,由那样的业为缘,在那一刹那生起,随后旋即消失。」「断裂」指脚上的束缚断开。「平息」指止息了。「空中宝珠」指名处宫殿中的宝珠等。「以自光照明」:即以自己极其明亮的光芒照耀。风不转起,即没有聚集吹动。粗风不起,而柔顺舒适、令众生快乐的和风吹起。他们俯伏在地,无法于高处站立。时节适宜:指具足不冷不热的气候。拍手是指手臂相击之声,意为将左手置于胸,以右掌击打而发出声音。以口欢呼是指发出欢呼的声音。成为单一的幢幡蔓,即相续不断的幢幡蔓聚作一处。不止这些,还有其余瑞相,例如:「降下种种花、种种香花之雨,太阳尚可见时星星便闪耀,清澈明净之水从地涌出」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dasasahassilokadhātukampī’’ti idaṃ satipi idha pāḷiyaṃ āgatatte vakkhamānānaṃ acchariyānaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ aññampi evarūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tantibaddhā vīṇā cammabaddhā bheriyoti pañcaṅgikatūriyassa nidassanamattaṃ, ca-saddena vā itaresampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Andubandhanādīni taṅkhaṇe eva chajjitvā puna pākatikāneva honti, tathā jaccandhādīnaṃ cakkhusotādīni tathārūpakammapaccayā tasmiṃyeva khaṇe uppajjitvā tāvadeva vigacchantī’’ti vadanti. Chijjiṃsūti ca pādesu bandhaṭṭhānesu chijjiṃsu. Vigacchiṃsūti vūpasamiṃsu. Ākāsaṭṭhakaratanāni nāma taṃtaṃvimānagatamaṇiratanādīni. Sakatejobhāsitānīti ativiya samujjalāya attano pabhāya obhāsitāni ahesuṃ. Nappavattīti na sannipāto. Na vāyīti kharo vāto na vāyi. Mudusukho pana sattānaṃ sukhāvaho vāyi. Pathavigatā ahesuṃ uccaṭṭhāne ṭhātuṃ avisahantā. Utusampannoti anuṇhāsītatāsaṅkhātena utunā sampanno. Apphoṭanaṃ vuccati bhujahatthasaṅghaṭṭanasaddo, atthato pana vāmahatthaṃ ure ṭhapetvā dakkhiṇena puthupāṇinā hatthatāḷanena saddakaraṇaṃ. Mukhena usseḷanaṃ saddassa muñcanaṃ seḷanaṃ. Ekaddhajamālā ahosi nirantaraṃ dhajamālāsamodhānagatāya. Na kevalañca etāni eva, atha kho aññānipi ‘‘vicittapupphasugandhapupphavassadevopavassi sūriye dissamāne eva tārakā obhāsiṃsu, acchaṃ vippasannaṃ udakaṃ pathavito ubbhijji, bilāsayā ca tiracchānā āsayato nikkhamiṃsu, rāgadosamohāpi tanu bhaviṃsu, pathaviyaṃ rajo vūpasami, aniṭṭhagandho vigacchi, dibbagandho vāyi, rūpino devā sarūpeneva manussānaṃ āpāthaṃ agamaṃsu, sattānaṃ cutūpapātā nāhesu’’nti evamādīni yāni mahābhinīhārasamaye uppannāni dvattiṃsapubbanimittāni, tāni anavasesato tadā ahesunti.
“在那里也”即在这些地震等现象中,也应知同样为前兆。意思是不仅在初生时的站立等之中。证得一切知智的前兆,因为动摇了一切所知以及外道师之见。无人教诫而自行在此一小世界集会,是无人教诫而同时聚集、领受法教的前兆。诸天先领受是获得天住的前兆,人间后领受是获得不动住的前兆,因为那住处具有稳固的性质。琵琶自鸣是无需他人教导,自然获得次第住的前兆。鼓自响是能宣告到轮围边际的大众的法鼓、不死鼓声的前兆。脚镣等的断裂是破除慢结缚的前兆。大众的病愈即是断除一切轮转苦病——证得谛理的前兆。“大众”一词应与“大众获得天眼、大众获得天耳界”等各处关联。由于以神足修习而成就殊胜智行之成就,所以说“宝座与台阶的速行成就是四神足证得的前兆”。善达其处是四无碍解证得的前兆,因为能够随顺义等而通达义等。宝石的自光照耀,即将显示世间的法光,所以这成为自光照耀的前兆。显示巴利原文
Tatrāpīti tesupi pathavikampādīsu evaṃ pubbanimittabhāvo veditabbo. Na kevalaṃ sampatijātassa ṭhānādīsu evāti adhippāyo. Sabbaññutaññāṇapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ sabbassa ñeyyassa, titthakaramatassa ca cālanato. Kenaci anussāhitānaṃyeva imasmiṃyeva ekacakkavāḷe sannipāto kenaci anussāhitānaṃyeva ekappahārenevasannipatitvā dhammapaṭiggaṇhanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ devatānaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ dibbavihārapaṭilābhassa, pacchā manussānaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ tattheva ṭhānassa niccalasabhāvato āneñjavihārapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Vīṇānaṃ sayaṃ vajjanaṃ parūpadesena vinā sayameva anupubbavihārapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Bherīnaṃ vajjanaṃ cakkavāḷapariyantāya parisāya pavedanasamatthassa dhammabheriyā anusāvanassa amatadundubhighosanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Andubandhanādīnaṃ chedo mānavinibandhabhedanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Mahājanassa rogavigamo tasseva sakalavaṭṭadukkharogavigamabhūtassa saccapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. ‘‘Mahājanassā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘mahājanassa dibbacakkhupaṭilābhassa, mahājanassa dibbasotadhātupaṭilābhassā’’tiādinā tattha tattha ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Iddhipādabhāvanāvasena sātisayañāṇajavasampattisiddhīti āha ‘‘pīṭhasappīnaṃ javasampadā caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimitta’’nti. Supaṭṭanasampāpuṇanaṃ catupaṭisambhidādhigamassa pubbanimittaṃ. Atthādianurūpaṃ atthādīsu sampaṭipattibhāvato. Ratanānaṃ sakatejobhāsitattaṃ yaṃ lokassa dhammobhāsaṃ dassessati, tena tassa sakatejobhāsitattassa pubbanimittaṃ.
证得四梵住的前兆,因为它彻底止息了怨敌。十一种火熄灭的前兆,因为涅槃是难以熄灭的。见智光的前兆,因为在无光处而能见光明。以涅槃味:即以烦恼寂灭之味。一味的:指教法在一切处同为一味,且令本来毫无甜味的世间变得完全甘甜。摧破六十二种恶见的前兆,因为彻底去除了恶见之风。舍弃虚空等无依、不平、动摇之处,鸟行于地,是舍弃如是邪执之后,众生以身命皈依三宝的前兆。如月为大众所喜爱:即如同月亮为大众所喜爱。太阳离寒热的时节乐,是获得离热恼的身心乐的前兆。诸天以拍手等游戏,是藉由度尽轮回、觉悟法性而以感兴语显示欢喜的前兆。法雨骤降:是以说法智之速疾降下不死法雨的前兆。以身至念的禅那为基础,生起道果乐之体验,是证得身至念不死甘露;而由于它也能带给身体无疲厌之乐,所以说无饥渴逼恼为前兆。在注疏中则分别就饥与渴而说。这些前兆的区分,应以特殊与共通的分类、以及牛与牛犊之理来了知。“自然”一词也与“开启八支圣道之门”相关联。圆满状态:即充满的状态。有人说“以圣幢幡蔓为装饰”是指以袈裟幢幡蔓为装饰,但实为包括天神的世间以圣道、觉支之幢幡蔓而庄严的前兆。至于此处未提及的,则容易了解。显示巴利原文
Catubrahmavihārapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ tassa sabbaso veravūpasamanato. Ekādasaagginibbāpanassa pubbanimittaṃ dunnibbāpananibbānabhāvato. Ñāṇālokādassanassa pubbanimittaṃ anāloke ālokadassanabhāvato. Nibbānarasenāti kilesānaṃ nibbāyanarasena. Ekarasabhāvassāti sāsanassa sabbattha ekarasabhāvassa, tañca kho amadhurassa lokassa sabbaso madhurabhāvāpādanena. Dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatabhindanassa pubbanimittaṃ sabbaso diṭṭhigatavātāpanayanavasena. Ākāsādiappatiṭṭhavisamacañcalaṭṭhānaṃ pahāya sakuṇānaṃ pathavigamanaṃ tādisaṃ micchāgāhaṃ pahāya sattānaṃ pāṇehi ratanattayasaraṇagamanassa pubbanittaṃ. Bahujanakantatāyāti candassa viya bahujanassa kantatāya. Sūriyassa uṇhasītavivajjitautusukhatā pariḷāhavivajjitakāyikacetasikasukhappattiyā pubbanimittaṃ.Devatānaṃ apphoṭanādīhi kīḷanaṃ pamoduppatti bhavantagamanena, dhammasabhāvabodhanena ca udānavasena pamodavibhāvanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Dhammavegavassanassāti desanāñāṇavegena dhammāmatassa vassanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Kāyagatāsativasena laddhaṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppāditamaggaphalasukhānubhavo kāyagatāsatiamatapaṭilābho, tassa pana kāyassāpi atappakasukhāvahattā khudāpipāsāpīḷanābhāvo pubbanimittaṃ vutto . Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana khudaṃ, pipāsañca bhinditvā vuttaṃ. Tattha pubbanimittānaṃ bhedo visesasāmaññavibhāgena, gobalībaddañāyena ca gahetabbo. ‘‘Sayamevā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgikamaggadvāravivaraṇassā’’ti etthāpi ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Bharitabhāvassāti paripuṇṇabhāvassa. ‘‘Ariyaddhajamālāmālitāyāti kāsāyaddhajamālāvantatāyā’’ti keci, sadevakassa lokassa pana ariyamaggabojjhaṅgaddhajamālāhi mālibhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ. Yaṃ panettha anuddhaṭaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
在此,即在“初生”等出现的这一段。早已解答了,因此我们这里没有新内容要说,这是意图。那时,菩萨虽在地上行走,在大众看来如同行于虚空。这里有以决定论说的方式,称为“这是法决定,是诸菩萨的法性”。以宿作论说的方式,称为“由于在过去生中造作、积集了那样的福业,故在大众看来如此”。以主宰化作论说的方式,称为“在这些众生之上有主宰之性,各自的业即名为‘主宰’,其造作即产生自己的果。大士也是由能征服含天神世间的广大福业所生,因此是由那主宰所化作,而这就是殊胜的化作,即大神力,由此而令大众如是显现”。如此种种宣说之后,何必用这种迂回之说呢?最终直接回答。初生时如何能以足行于地?如此有大神力,仿佛行于虚空一般,这是基于推想的方式,犹如行于虚空。由于快速行过七步,虽然可见形体,但在大众看来宛如不可见。裸形、幼小的身体与那样的威仪不相称,因此应知由于业力所生的神变,他如同庄严整备者,如同十六岁青年般显现在大众面前。这只是以菩萨的福德威力,在当时这样显现而已。后来他只是幼童,并非如此。因为如实开示了合乎佛陀身份的菩萨威力,大众由他的回答,如同由佛陀……心生欢喜。显示巴利原文
Etthāti ‘‘sampatijāto’’tiādinā āgate imasmiṃ vāre. Vissajjitova, tasmā amhehi idha apubbaṃ vattabbaṃ natthīti adhippāyo. Tadā pathaviyaṃ gacchantopi mahāsatto ākāsena gacchanto viya mahājanassa tathā upaṭṭhāsīti ayamettha niyati dhammaniyāmo bodhisattānaṃ dhammatā ti idaṃ niyativādavasena kathanaṃ. Pubbe purimajātīsu tādisassa puññasambhārakammassa katattā upacitattā mahājanassa tathā upaṭṭhāsīti idaṃ pubbekatakammavādavasena kathanaṃ. Imesaṃ sattānaṃ upari īsanasīlatāya yathāsakaṃ kammameva issaro nāma, tassa nimmānaṃ attano phalassa nibbattanaṃ mahāpurisopi sadevakaṃ lokaṃ abhibhavituṃ samatthena uḷārena puññakammena nibbattito, tena issarena nimmito nāma, tassa cāyaṃ nimmānaviseso, yadidaṃ mahānubhāvatā, yāya mahājanassa tathā upaṭṭhāsīti idaṃ issaranimmānavasena kathanaṃ. Evaṃ taṃ taṃ bahulaṃ vatvā kiṃ imāya pariyāyakathāyāti avasāne ujukameva byākari. Sampatijāto pathaviyaṃ kathaṃ padasā gacchati, evaṃ mahānubhāvo ākāsena maññe gacchatīti parikappanavasena ākāsena gacchanto viya ahosi. Sīghataraṃ pana sattapadavītihārena gatattā dissamānarūpopi mahājanassa adissamāno viya ahosi. Acelakabhāvo, khuddakasarīratā ca tādisassa iriyāpathassa na anucchavikāti kammānubhāvasañjanitapāṭihāriyavasena alaṅkatapaṭiyatto viya, soḷasavassuddesiko viya ca mahājanassa upaṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ. Mahāsattassa puññānubhāvena tadā tathā upaṭṭhānamattamevetanti. Pacchā bāladārakova ahosi, na tādisoti. Buddhabhāvānucchavikassa bodhisattānubhāvassa yāthāvato paveditattā parisā cassa byākaraṇena buddhena viya…pe… attamanā ahosi.
“一切法性”:应知,即前面所说的全部十六种法性,为一切菩萨所共有。依福德与智慧资粮的显示,可知诸菩萨彼此同等。显示巴利原文
Sabbadhammatāti sabbā soḷasavidhāpi yathāvuttā dhammatā sabbabodhisattānaṃ hontīti veditabbā puññañāṇasambhāradassanena nesaṃ ekasadisattā.
三十二大人相解释显示巴利原文
Dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
33 “细滑布团”:指为方便少年躺卧而折叠好的细软滑布。“刹帝利、婆罗门”等,是种姓;“憍陈如、乔达摩”等,是姓氏;“波尼迦、吉迦利迦、释迦族、拘利族”等,是家族名。“等”字包含了容貌、自在、眷属等一切成就。“大”:意为广大、殊胜,即成就与圆满。“应去之道”:此处的“道”指以业为所行(业为所成就),也就是说,通过再生,由善行和恶行所应去往之处即是道,亦即再生有的差别。随其意愿而流转的,称为趣向(道),也指内心的倾向。“皈依处”:指归宿、依止。对于已脱离一切有为法的阿拉汉,涅槃便是他的皈依处。“那些我”:即“那些我”。显示巴利原文
33.Dukūlacumbaṭaketi daharassa nipajjanayogyatāvasena paṭisaṃhaṭadukūlasukhume. ‘‘Khattiyo brāhmaṇo’’ti evamādi jāti. ‘‘Koṇḍañño gotamo’’ti evamādi gottaṃ. ‘‘Poṇikā cikkhallikā sākiyā koḷiyā’’ti evamādi kulapadeso. Ādi-saddena rūpissariyaparivārādisabbasampattiyo saṅgaṇhāti. Mahantassāti vipulassa, uḷārassāti attho. Nipphattiyoti siddhiyo. Gantabbagatiyāti gati-saddassa kammasādhanatamāha. Upapajjanavasena hi sucaritaduccaritehi gantabbāti gatiyo, upapattibhavaviseso. Gacchati yathāruci pavattatīti gati, ajjhāsayo. Paṭisaraṇeti parāyaṇe avassaye. Sabbasaṅkhatavisaṃyuttassa hi arahato nibbānameva taṃpaṭisaraṇaṃ. Tyāhanti te ahaṃ.
奉行十种善法以及不可谴责的王法(详见《本生经·大肉本生》的广说)者,称为“法随者”。由于以此法使整个世间欢喜,故称“法王”。因为转轮圣王依法、依正道获得王权,而非以非法,所以说“因依法得王位故为法王”。其四方皆以大海为边际,因此称为“四边”,所指便是“以大海为边际的大地”,所以说“东方……(中略)……自在者”。“征服者”:指征服了应被征服者,即征服内在的贪欲、嗔恚等,以及外在的敌军、敌王,并保持了已征服的状态。虽然严格来说,转轮王并没有战争,但由于已成就了需通过战争才能获得的胜利,故称“已征服战场”。“达到地方稳固者”:因这位国王具足四种稀有法等,地方人民对他生起了不可被任何人动摇的坚定爱戴;或者,地方人民因他如法行事而获得稳定、牢固,故称“达到地方稳固者”。将刀架在人们胸口,以夺取所欲财物等方式施加暴行者,称为“暴虐者”。显示巴利原文
Dasavidhe kusaladhamme, agarahite ca rājadhamme (jā. 2 mahāmaṃsajātake vitthāro) niyuttoti dhammiko. Tena ca dhammena sakalaṃ lokaṃ rañjetīti dhammarājā. Yasmā cakkavattī dhammena ñāyena rajjaṃ adhigacchati, na adhammena, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammena laddharajjattā dhammarājā’’ti. Catūsu disāsu samuddapariyosānatāya caturantā nāma tattha tattha dīpe mahāpathavīti āha ‘‘puratthima…pe… issaro’’ti. Vijitāvīti vijetabbassa vijitavā, kāmakodhādikassa abbhantarassa, paṭirājabhūtassa bāhirassa ca arigaṇassa vijayi, vijetvā ṭhitoti attho. Kāmaṃ cakkavattino kenaci yuddhaṃ nāma natthi, yuddhena pana sādhetabbassa vijayassa siddhiyā ‘‘vijitasaṅgāmo’’ti vuttaṃ. Janapadova catubbidhaacchariyadhammādisamannāgate asmiṃ rājini thāvariyaṃ kenaci asaṃhāriyaṃ daḷhaṃ bhattabhāvaṃ patto, janapade vā attano dhammikāya paṭipattiyā thāvariyaṃ thirabhāvaṃ pattoti janapadatthāvariyappatto. Manussānaṃ ure satthaṃ ṭhapetvā icchitadhanaharaṇādinā parasāhasakāritāya sāhasikā.
依产生喜悦之义,即产生不炽热的喜与悦。从词义上说,由于它能令人喜悦,故称为「宝」。应在心中作意‘啊,真是迷人!’,因此它是「为心所敬」的。他们说:这种敬重是由于它值得供养,因此「为心所敬」即是「应供养」的意思。其价值巨大、广大、无有限量,故为「大价值」。没有任何秤或譬喻能衡量它,故为「无可比」,即无与伦比。因只是偶尔出现,极难获得,故为「难见」。唯有具足无量、殊胜功德的众生才能受用,故为「非下劣众生所受用」。现在,为显明在轮宝中特别成就了这些「为心所敬」等义,并以此类推其余诸宝,故开始说「轮宝……」等。对国主而言,它不像其他事物那样是寻常的依止处,因为它是获得不共权威等成就之因,也是众生得偿所愿之因。它的价值无法估量,因为它由极殊胜、光耀的七宝所成,且具足稀有、神妙的大威神力。它有多大价值,便有多无可比。当众生厌弃罪恶,远离黑暗,专注福德并变得清净,这样的时代才适合佛陀出现。同样,转轮圣王也唯有在这种时代……显示巴利原文
Ratijananaṭṭhenāti atappakapītisomanassuppādanena. Saddatthato pana rametīti ratanaṃ. ‘‘Aho manohara’’nti citte kattabbatāya cittīkataṃ. ‘‘Svāyaṃ cittīkāro tassa pūjanīyatāyā’’ti cittīkatanti pūjanīyanti atthaṃ vadanti. Mahantaṃ vipulaṃ aparimitaṃ mūlaṃ agghatīti mahagghaṃ. Natthi etassa tulā upamāti atulaṃ, asadisaṃ. Kadāci eva uppajjanato dukkhena laddhabbattā dullabhadassanaṃ. Anomehi uḷāraguṇeheva sattehi paribhuñjitabbato anomasattaparibhogaṃ. Idāni nesaṃ cittīkatādiatthānaṃ savisesaṃ cakkaratane labbhamānataṃ dassetvā itaresupi te atidisituṃ ‘‘cakkaratanassa cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Aññaṃ devaṭṭhānaṃ nāma na hoti rañño anaññasādhāraṇissariyādisampattipaṭilābhahetuto, sattānañca yathicchitatthapaṭilābhahetuto. Aggho natthi ativiya uḷārasamujjalasattaratanamayattā, acchariyabbhutamahānubhāvatāya ca. Yadaggena mahagghaṃ, tadaggena atulaṃ. Sattānaṃ pāpajigucchanena vigatakāḷako puññapasutatāya maṇḍabhūto yādiso kālo buddhuppādāraho, tādise eva cakkavattīnampi sambhavoti āha ‘‘yasmā ca panā’’tiādi. Upamāvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ, upamopameyyānañca na accantameva sadisatā. Tasmā yathā buddhā kadāci karahaci uppajjanti, na tathā cakkavattino, evaṃ santepi cakkavattivattaparipūraṇassāpi dukkarabhāvatopi dullabhuppādāyevāti , iminā dullabhuppādatāsāmaññena tesaṃ dullabhadassanatā vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Kāmaṃ cakkaratanānubhāvena sijjhamāno guṇo cakkavattiparivārasādhāraṇo, tathāpi ‘‘cakkavattī eva naṃ sāmibhāvena visavitāya paribhuñjatī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati tadatthaṃ uppajjanatoti dassento ‘‘tadeta’’ntiādimāha. Yathāvuttānaṃ pañcannaṃ, channampi vā atthānaṃ itararatanesupi labbhanato ‘‘evaṃ sesānipī’’ti vuttaṃ. Hatthiassa-pariṇāyakaratanehi ajitavijayato, cakkaratanena ca parivārabhāvena, sesehi paribhogūpakaraṇabhāvena samannāgato. Hatthiassamaṇiitthiratanehi paribhogūpakaraṇabhāvena sesehi parivārabhāvenāti yojanā.
「四大洲的荣华财富」:指在那里获得的荣华成就与财富成就。「同样的」:即如前所述‘仅在午前……’等所宣说的威力。能覆盖一由旬的范围,指能覆盖一由旬的黑暗。它远离了过长等六种过失。显示巴利原文
Catunnaṃ mahādīpānaṃ sirivibhavanti tattha laddhaṃ sirisampattiñceva bhogasampattiñca. Tādisamevāti ‘‘purebhattamevā’’tiādinā vuttānubhāvameva. Yojanappamāṇaṃ padesaṃ byāpanena yojanappamāṇaṃ andhakāraṃ. Atidīghatādichabbidhadosaparivajjitaṃ.
「勇者」:意为有力量者、无畏者,故说「无畏者」。「特征」:即原因。因为以此原因可称他们为「英雄」,该原因即是英雄的特征。因此说「这是精进力的名称」。由于轮宝转动直至轮围山,所以说「以轮围山为界,以安立之大海为边际」。由「无罚」这一句,即已显示不施罚金与身体刑罚;由「无刀兵」这一句,则显示不以军队作战。为说明此两者,而说「对于那些犯错的人……」等。所说的状态,即是以大海为边际。显示巴利原文
Sūrāti sattivanto, nibbhayāti atthoti āha ‘‘abhīrukā’’ti. Aṅganti kāraṇaṃ. Yena kāraṇena ‘‘vīrā’’ti vucceyyuṃ, taṃ vīraṅgaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vīriyassetaṃnāma’’nti. Yāva cakkavāḷapabbatā cakkassa vattanato ‘‘cakkavāḷapabbataṃ sīmaṃ katvā ṭhitasamuddapariyanta’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Adaṇḍenā’’ti imināva dhanadaṇḍassa, sarīradaṇḍassa ca akaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Asatthenā’’ti iminā pana senāya yujjhanassāti tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye katāparādhe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vuttappakāranti sāgarapariyantaṃ.
以染着为义,名为“贪”;以渴爱为义,名为“渴爱”,这是就烦恼现行形态的差别而把贪分为两种的说法。同样,这两种贪也完全具有覆盖的含义。正如所说:“当人被贪欲所征服时,那便是盲目的黑暗”,以及“被渴爱所覆盖”。依此类推,嗔等也具有覆盖的含义。由于提到了“烦恼”,其中也包含了疑等其余的烦恼。因为所有这些不善法生起时,都会覆盖、缠缚众生的相续,障碍善法的运行,所以被称为“覆盖者”、“覆盖”。而“揭开了覆盖”(vivaṭṭacchadā)是把o音改作ā音的表达。显示巴利原文
‘‘Rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā’’ti pavattiākārabhedena lobho eva dvidhā vutto . Tathā hissa dvidhāpi chadanaṭṭho ekantiko. Yathāha ‘‘andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ rāgo sahate nara’’nti, (netti. 11, 27) ‘‘taṇhāchadanachāditā’’ti (udā. 64) ca. Iminā nayena dosādīnampi chadanaṭṭho vattabbo. Kilesaggahaṇena vicikicchādayo sesakilesā vuttā. Yasmā te sabbe pāpadhammā uppajjamānā sattasantānaṃ chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhanti kusalappavattiṃ nivārenti, tasmā te ‘‘chadanā, chadā’’ti ca vuttā. Vivaṭṭacchadāti ca o-kārassa ā-kāraṃ katvā niddeso.
35 “那些”:指两种成就。“成为表征”:即成为令了知的因相。确实,通过这些可以识别出大人之相,故称为“相”。在站立、行走等时,双脚平稳地安立于地面,这样的人就有“善安立之脚”。为通过遮遣的方式显示其善安立之脚性,而说“如同……”等。其中,“前脚掌”指脚掌的前部,“脚后跟”指脚跟部分,“边”指脚掌两侧中的任意一侧,即边缘的侧面。而“此人的……”等,是依随顺的方式阐明其义。如同金鞋底般平整地放下,在放下时整个脚掌同时触地;同样,在提起时整个脚掌也同时离地。因此,这样的人被称为“善安立之脚”。至于因足底平整等而有的种种稀有奇异果报,将在后面的《相经释》中说明。显示巴利原文
35.Tāsanti dvinnampi nipphattīnaṃ. Nimittabhūtānīti ñāpakakāraṇabhūtāni. Tathā hi lakkhīyati mahāpurisabhāvo etehīti lakkhaṇāni. Ṭhānagamanādīsu bhūmiyaṃ suṭṭhu samaṃ patiṭṭhitā pādā etassāti suppatiṭṭhitapādo. Taṃ panassa suppatiṭṭhitapādataṃ byatirekamukhena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha aggatalanti aggapādatalaṃ. Paṇhīti paṇhitalaṃ. Passanti pādatalassa dvīsu passesu ekekaṃ, ubhayameva vā pariyantaṃ passaṃ. ‘‘Assa panā’’tiādi anvayato atthavibhāvanaṃ. Suvaṇṇapādukatalamiva ujukaṃ nikkhipiyamānaṃ. Ekappahārenevāti ekakkhaṇeyeva. Sakalaṃ pādatalaṃ bhūmiṃ phusati nikkhipane. Ekappahāreneva sakalaṃ pādatalaṃ bhūmito uṭṭhahatīti yojanā. Tasmā ayaṃ suppatiṭṭhitapādoti nigamanaṃ. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ anupubbaninnādiacchariyabbhutaṃ nissandaphalaṃ, taṃ parato lakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.201) āvibhavissatīti.
“脐可见”:指轮相的中心,呈圆形,极为分明可见,能够被觉知,这是其用意。“为脐所分断”:指被该中心所划分,以划分的方式而存在。“朝向脐的包围圈板”:指为了保护普通车轮的轴不被撞击而应安放在朝向车脐位置的包围圈板,这里指那个覆盖之物。“轮辋上的摩尼刻线”:指在轮辋上成行排列的摩尼刻线。“多种的”:指种种细节线条的解说。“矛”:指兵器矛。“吉祥纹”:指吉祥的图案。“欢喜纹”:指右旋的图案。“卐字纹”:指卐字形的图案。“耳环纹”:指耳饰,即编束成环状的头发。“增长纹”:指前方等处如灯焰状的图案。“孔雀手纹”:指孔雀尾翎束,或说绣有孔雀尾翎的特定扇子图案。“野马尾拂纹”:指拂尘毛状的图案。“白芥子等满瓶、满钵”等线纹。说完“轮围”后,为说明其主要部分,说“雪山、须弥……乃至……千”。“依据转轮王的随从们”,这是为了显示象宝等在那些地方也能获得。应知,如前所述具有全武器等种种细节的殊胜,都是属于轮相的眷属。显示巴利原文
Nābhi dissatīti lakkhaṇacakkassa nābhi parimaṇḍalasaṇṭhānā suparibyattā hutvā dissati, labbhatīti adhippāyo. Nābhiparicchinnāti tassaṃ nābhiyaṃ paricchinnā paricchedavasena ṭhitā. Nābhimukhaparikkhepapaṭṭoti pakaticakkassa akkhabbhāhatapariharaṇatthaṃ nābhimukhe ṭhapetabbaṃ parikkhepapaṭṭo, tappaṭicchanno idha adhippeto. Nemimaṇikāti nemiyaṃ āvalibhāvena ṭhitamaṇikālekhā. Sambahulavāroti bahuvidhalekhaṅgavibhāvanavāro. Sattīti āvudhasatti. Sirivacchoti siriaṅgā. Nandīti dakkhiṇāvattaṃ. Sovattikoti sovattiaṅgo. Vaṭaṃsakoti āveḷaṃ. Vaḍḍhamānakanti purimahādīsu dīpaṅkaṃ. Morahatthakoti morapiñchakalāpo, morapiñchapaṭisibbito vā bījanīviseso. Vāḷabījanīti cāmarivālaṃ. Siddhatthādi puṇṇaghaṭapuṇṇapātiyo. ‘‘Cakkavāḷo’’ti vatvā tassa padhānāvayave dassetuṃ ‘‘himavā sineru…pe… sahassānī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cakkavattirañño parisaṃ upādāyā’’ti idaṃ hatthiratanādīnampi tattha labbhamānabhāvadassanaṃ. Sabbotisattiādiko yathāvutto aṅgaviseso cakkalakkhaṇasseva parivāroti veditabbo.
“广长的足跟”:这是对照他人足跟较长而言,但并非过长,因此说“圆满的足跟”。而为了通过遮遣的方式说明足跟相如何才算圆满,便说“正如……”等。“以尖端”:指用圆形的顶部。“卷拢”:指为了使其极为圆整而卷拢。“如同红色的毛毬”:指像红色羊毛所制成的球。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āyatapaṇhī’’ti idaṃ aññesaṃ paṇhito dīghataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pana atidīghatanti āha ‘‘paripuṇṇapaṇhī’’ti. Yathā pana paṇhilakkhaṇaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ nāma hoti, taṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āraggenāti maṇḍalāya sikhāya. Vaṭṭetvāti yathā suvaṭṭaṃ hoti, evaṃ vaṭṭetvā. Rattakambalageṇḍukasadisāti rattakambalamayageṇḍukasadisā.
“如猴的”:这是就长度及平整而言。“树脂油”:指混有榕树胶等树脂的油,也称作“香树脂”。此处举树脂油,是为了显示绿黄色薄层的稠密润滑之态。显示巴利原文
‘‘Makkaṭassevā’’ti dīghabhāvaṃ, samatañca sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Niyyāsatelenāti chattiritaniyyāsādiniyyāsasammissena telena, yaṃ ‘‘surabhiniyyāsa’’ntipi vadanti. Niyyāsatelaggahaṇañcettha haritālavaṭṭiyā ghanasiniddhabhāvadassanatthaṃ.
犹如经百次弹打的棉絮片浸入乳酥中变得极其柔软,为显示大人手足也是如此,故说“乳酥中”等。“嫩”:即纤细柔嫩。显示巴利原文
Yathā satakkhattuṃ vihataṃ kappāsapaṭalaṃ sappimaṇḍe osāritaṃ ativiya mudu hoti, evaṃ mahāpurisassa hatthapādāti dassento ‘‘sappimaṇḍe’’tiādimāha. Talunāti sukhumālā.
“以皮”:指包裹指间之皮。“指间相连”:并非仅单侧相连。“等量”:从长度上看,彼此均等。“麦纹”:生于手指内侧关节上的纹路。“穿透”:由于各指节位置对应,即使在伸指时,手指也如同相互穿透一般,彼此相触而住。显示巴利原文
Cammenāti aṅgulantaraveṭhitacammena. Paṭibaddhaaṅgulantaroti ekato sambaddhaaṅgulantaro na hoti. Ekappamāṇāti dīghato samānappamāṇā. Yavalakkhaṇanti abbhantarato aṅgulipabbe ṭhitaṃ yavalakkhaṇaṃ. Paṭivijjhitvāti taṃtaṃpabbānaṃ samānadesatāya aṅgulīnaṃ pasāritakālepi aññamaññaṃ vijjhitāni viya phusitvā tiṭṭhanti.
“螺”指踝骨。踝骨以上,称为“高踝”,即脚。“在脚背”,即脚背附近。“以彼”指因踝骨安立在脚背处的状态而被系缚,这便是连结。此“以彼”一词也应当连接到后面两句:“因为这种被系缚的状态,不能随意转动;因为不能随意转动,行走时脚底便不显现”。“上方”指从脚背向上约二指高度,也有人认为约四指。它们被隐藏,不似常人那样明显可见。“以彼”即踝骨安立于上方的状态。“他的”指大人的。为表明即使有余处动摇,此处仍稳固,故举脐为例。“唯下躯动摇”是前句的原因句:因为唯有下躯动摇,故从脐……是稳固的。“以乐脚转动”则是前句与后句的原因句:因为以乐脚转动,故唯有下躯动摇;因为以乐脚转动,故向前……唯向后。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhā vuccanti gopphakā, uddhaṃ saṅkhā etesanti ussaṅkhā, pādā. Piṭṭhipādeti piṭṭhipādasamīpe. Tenāti piṭṭhipāde ṭhitagopphakabhāvena baddhā hontīti yojanā. Tayidaṃ ‘‘tenā’’ti padaṃ uparipadadvayepi yojetabbaṃ ‘‘tena baddhabhāvena na yathāsukhaṃ parivaṭṭanti, tena yathāsukhaṃ naparivaṭṭanena gacchantānaṃ pādatalānipi na dissantī’’ti. Uparīti piṭṭhipādato dvitiaṅgulimattaṃ uddhaṃ, ‘‘caturaṅgulamatta’’nti ca vadanti. Nigūḷhāni ca honti, na aññesaṃ viya paññāyamānāni. Tenāti gopphakānaṃ upari patiṭṭhitabhāvena. Assāti mahāpurisassa. Satipi desantarappavattiyaṃ niccaloti dassanatthaṃ nābhiggahaṇaṃ. ‘‘Adhokāyova iñjatī’’ti idaṃ purimapadassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā adhokāyova iñjati, tasmā nābhito…pe… niccalo hoti. ‘‘Sukhena pādā parivaṭṭantī’’ti idaṃ pana purimassa, pacchimassa ca kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā sukhena pādā parivaṭṭanti, tasmā adhokāyova iñjati, yasmā sukhena pādā parivaṭṭanti, tasmā puratopi…pe… pacchatoyevāti.
因为羚羊的腿四周肌肉均匀,越往上越粗壮,大人也是如此,所以说“胫如羚羊”。“圆足胫”即四周肌肉丰满、圆润的腿。因此说“非仅单侧”等。显示巴利原文
Yasmā eṇimigassa samantato ekasadisamaṃsā anukkamena uddhaṃ thūlā jaṅghā honti, tathā mahāpurisassāpi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘eṇimigasadisajaṅgho’’ti. Paripuṇṇajaṅghoti samantato maṃsūpacayena paripuṇṇajaṅgho. Tenāha ‘‘na ekato’’tiādi.
“以此”即“不弯腰”等语,意在表明膝触安乐的状态。“余众”指不具备这一相的人。他们或为驼背——因下身短于上身;或为侏儒——因上身短于下身。这表明除正自觉者与转轮圣王外,其他一切众生皆入驼背或侏儒之列。显示巴利原文
Etenāti ‘‘anonamanto’’tiādivacanena, jāṇuphāsubhāvadīpanenāti attho. Avasesajanāti iminā lakkhaṇena rahitajanā. Khujjā vā honti heṭṭhimakāyato uparimakāyassa rassatāya, vāmanā vā uparimakāyato heṭṭhimakāyassa rassatāya, etena ṭhapetvā sammāsambuddhaṃ, cakkavattinañca itare sattā khujjapakkhikā, vāmanapakkhikā cāti dasseti.
诚然,所有莲花的花蕊皆是金色,然而金莲花的花蕊以其光耀殊胜,较彼更为超绝,故说“似金莲花蕊的”。“安放的”是说收摄于内、含摄其中。那如此之状便因此被覆盖,故说“被覆盖的”。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ sabbāpi padumakaṇṇikā suvaṇṇavaṇṇāva, kañcanapadumakaṇṇikā pana pabhassarabhāvena tato sātisayāti āha ‘‘suvaṇṇapadumakaṇṇikasadisehī’’ti. Ohitanti samohitaṃ antogadhaṃ. Tathābhūtaṃ pana taṃ tena channaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘paṭicchanna’’nti.
“金色”即金色之色,这是此处的含义,故说“以生朱砂”等,此义亦应通过语义转换来理解。此处“色”一词意指身体。提出第一种解释后,考虑到并无那样的惯用说法,便取“色”字为颜色之义,即以色为颜色之同义词,从而给出第二种解释。以此,两种解释皆表述为“犹如极润滑的黄金那样的肤色”。显示巴利原文
Suvaṇṇavaṇṇoti suvaṇṇavaṇṇavaṇṇoti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘jātihiṅgulakenā’’tiādi, svāyamattho āvuttiñāyena ca veditabbo. Sarīrapariyāyo idha vaṇṇa-saddoti adhippāyo. Paṭhamavikappaṃ vatvā tathārūpāya pana ruḷhiyā abhāvaṃ manasi katvā vaṇṇadhātupariyāyameva vaṇṇa-saddaṃ gahetvā dutiyavikappo vutto. Tasmā padadvayenāpi suniddhantasuvaṇṇasadisachavivaṇṇoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“尘”指微细的灰尘。“垢”则指能导致污秽的灰尘积聚。因此经中说“或垢”。若污垢会自然脱落,为何还要沐浴等呢?所以经文说“洗手等”。显示巴利原文
Rajoti sukhumarajo. Jallanti malīnabhāvāvaho reṇusañcayo. Tenāha ‘‘malaṃ vā’’ti. Yadi vivattati, kathaṃ nhānādīnīti āha ‘‘hatthadhovanādīnī’’tiādi.
“在旋的末端”是指依右旋方式转动的发旋之末端。显示巴利原文
Āvaṭṭapariyosāneti padakkhiṇāvaṭṭanavasena pavattassa āvaṭṭassa ante.
“如梵天一般身姿端正”:因为梵天的身体无论前后都不弯曲,笔直向上伸展,所以说他像梵天一样身体笔直。不过,这种端身之相要在身体各部位发育成熟时才能显现,并非在幼年时期,因此经文说“将具挺拔长躯”。关于另外两处,即“肩膀与膝盖”那两句,经文说“前屈者向前弯曲”,应连接起来理解。所谓“侧弯”,是指向右胁或左胁弯曲。所谓“如柱相似”,是说就像安立画像时所立的柱基那样。显示巴利原文
Brahmuno sarīraṃ purato vā pacchato vā anonamitvā ujukameva uggatanti āha ‘‘brahmā viya ujugatto’’ti. Sā panāyaṃ ujugattatā avayavesu buddhippattesu daṭṭhabbā, na daharakāleti vuttaṃ ‘‘uggatadīghasarīro bhavissatī’’ti. Itaresūti ‘‘khandhajāṇūsū’’ti imesu dvīsu ṭhānesu namantā purato namantīti ānetvā sambandho. Passavaṅkāti dakkhiṇapassena vā vāmapassena vā vaṅkā. Sūlasadisāti potthakarūpakaraṇe ṭhapitasūlapādasadisā.
“七处隆满”是指以手背等为代表的七处身体部位丰隆饱满、肌肉充实。在句法上应理解为“骨端显现”。由于经文中已说“隐伏的脉网”这一相文,因此也就等于同时说明了“骨端隐伏”。此处“手背等”中的“等”字已包含了肩峰与肩头之义;为表示其中一部分特征,才进一步用“转起……以肩”等语加以说明。同样,借助“如石像”等表述,肩峰隐伏之相也得以阐明。显示巴利原文
Hatthapiṭṭhiādivasena satta sarīrāvayavā ussadā upacitamaṃsā etassāti sattussado. Aṭṭhikoṭiyo paññāyantīti yojanā. Nigūḷhasirājālehīti lakkhaṇavacanametanti tena nigūḷhaaṭṭhikoṭīhītipi vuttameva hotīti. Hatthapiṭṭhādīhīti ettha ādi-saddena aṃsakūṭakhandhakūṭānaṃ saṅgahe siddhe taṃ ekadesena dassento ‘‘vaṭṭetvā…pe… khandhenā’’ti āha. ‘‘Silārūpakaṃ viyā’’tiādinā vā nigūḷhaaṃsakūṭatāpi vibhāvitā yevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
狮子的前半身称为“狮子前半身”。由于他身体各部分圆满具足,整个身躯犹如狮子的前半身,因此被称为“狮子前半身者”。所以经中说:“如同狮子的前半身,整个身体都圆满。”“似狮子”即如同狮子。“不成为恶立、异立”的意思是:既不是恶劣的安立,也不是畸形的安立,也就是说,各个肢节不会因为不相称或畸形而安立。“安立”即站立的姿态。所谓“以长者”,指手指、鼻等;“以短者”,指颈等;“以粗者”,指大腿、臂等;“以细者”,指头发、汗毛、腰等;“以广者”,指眼、手掌等;“以圆者”,指小腿、手等。显示巴利原文
Sīhassa pubbaddhaṃ sīhapubbaddhaṃ, paripuṇṇāvayavatāya sīhapubbaddhaṃ viya sakalo kāyo assāti sīhapubbaddhakāyo. Tenāha ‘‘sīhassa pubbaddhakāyo viya sabbo kāyo paripuṇṇo’’ti. Sīhassevāti sīhassa viya. Dussaṇṭhitavisaṇṭhito na hotīti duṭṭhu saṇṭhito, virūpasaṇṭhito ca na hoti, tesaṃ tesaṃ avayavānaṃ ayuttabhāvena, virūpabhāvena ca saṇṭhiti upagato na hotīti attho. Saṇṭhantīti saṇṭhahanti. Dīghehīti aṅgulināsādīhi. Rassehīti gīvādīhi. Thūlehīti ūrubāhuādīhi . Kisehīti kesalomamajjhādīhi. Puthulehīti akkhihatthatalādīhi. Vaṭṭehīti jaṅghahatthādīhi.
“百福相”意味着由于具足百福之相,以种种心、以福德心所雕画,从而成就了如此的心之状态。它“只有这样才能成为诸佛法身的依止基础”,是由十波罗蜜所准备、所庄严而成的。另有一种异读作“以施心、以福心”,意思是依布施、持戒等所转起的福德心而成就。显示巴利原文
Satapuññalakkhaṇatāya nānācittena puññacittena cittito sañjātacittabhāvo ‘‘īdiso eva buddhānaṃ dhammakāyassa adhiṭṭhānaṃ bhavituṃ yutto’’ti dasapāramīhi sajjito abhisaṅkhato, ‘‘dānacittena puññacittenā’’ti vā pāṭho, dānavasena, sīlādivasena ca pavattapuññacittenāti attho.
“两肩之间”指两臂背面之间、后背中央的上部区域。“积聚圆满”指无凹陷地积聚,因与两肩齐平而圆满。“隆起”指高耸而平坦无凹,这便是它的含义。因此说“如金板”。显示巴利原文
Dvinnaṃ koṭṭānaṃ antaranti dvinnaṃ piṭṭhibāhānaṃ vemajjhaṃ piṭṭhimajjhassa uparibhāgo. Citaṃ paripuṇṇanti aninnabhāvena citaṃ, dvīhi koṭṭehi samatalatāya paripuṇṇaṃ. Uggammāti uggantvā, aninnaṃ samatalaṃ hutvāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘suvaṇṇaphalakaṃ viyā’’ti.
“如尼拘律树般周圆”的意思是:如同周圆的尼拘律树那样周圆。本应完整地说成“尼拘律树般周圆之周圆”,但省略了一个“周圆”词而简说为“尼拘律树般周圆”。因此经文说“枝干等齐的尼拘律树”等。并非所有的尼拘律树都是周圆的,但因为这里有“周圆”一词与之相邻,所取的正是指周圆的那种尼拘律树。所以,即使不省略那个“周圆”词,此义也可获得,因此说“如尼拘律树般周圆”。至于“其……为量”,是将o音转成了va音。显示巴利原文
Nigrodho viya parimaṇḍaloti parimaṇḍalanigrodho viya parimaṇḍalo, ‘‘nigrodhaparimaṇḍalaparimaṇḍalo’’ti vattabbe ekassa parimaṇḍala-saddassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo’’ti vutto. Tenāha ‘‘samakkhandhasākho nigrodho’’tiādi. Na hi sabbo nigrodho parimaṇḍaloti, parimaṇḍalasaddasannidhānena vā parimaṇḍalova nigrodho gayhatīti ekassa parimaṇḍalasaddassa lopena vināpi ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘nigrodho viya parimaṇḍalo’’ti. Yāvatako assāti yāvatakvassa o-kārassa va-kārādesaṃ katvā.
“肩圆好”指双肩匀称圆满。连贯起来说,即如鹤之长颈、如鹭之弯颈、如猪之粗颈;又如金制的小腰鼓。显示巴利原文
Samavaṭṭitakkhandhoti samaṃ suvaṭṭitakkhandho. Koñcā viya dīghagalā, bakā viya vaṅkagalā , varāhā viya puthulagalāti yojanā. Suvaṇṇāḷiṅgasadisoti suvaṇṇamayakhuddakamudiṅgasadiso.
「味端最上者」:将甘甜等种种味吞入、纳于内者,名为味端;一切味端中最上的,称为味端最上。他具有这些,故为味端最上者。正因为如此,由于精气不能遍满、界分低劣,所以他们多有疾病。显示巴利原文
Rasaggasaggīti madhurādibhedaṃ rasaṃ gasanti anto pavesantīti rasaggasā rasaggasānaṃ aggā rasaggasaggā, tā etassa santīti rasaggasaggī. Tenāti ojāya apharaṇena hīnadhātukattā te bahvābādhā honti.
「颊」是支撑牙齿之处的名称。世尊的颊如同狮子的颊,故世尊称为「狮子颊」。于此,佛陀的色身与法身,一切譬喻都只是低劣的譬喻,没有等同的譬喻,更无殊胜的譬喻,因此为了说明这也只是低劣的譬喻,而说了「于此」等语。由于大丈夫的下牙与上牙依低劣的相当而安立,故说「二者皆圆满」。但这并非完全的周圆,仅是以三分之余的圆性,所以说「如十二日半月的月亮」。「善察」:即依自己的相论而观察。牙齿的高低也要从内外方面来了解,不止是看尖端。因此说「如同用铁片切开的螺膜」。「铁片」指锯子。意思是「它们将是平齐的,而非高低不齐,呈齐平之相」。显示巴利原文
Hanūti sannissayadantādhārassa samaññā, taṃ bhagavato sīhassa hanu viya, tasmā bhagavā sīhahanu. Tattha yasmā buddhānaṃ rūpakāyassa, dhammakāyassa ca upamā nāma hīnūpamāva, natthi samānūpamā, kuto adhikūpamā, tasmā ayampi hīnūpamāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmā mahāpurisassa heṭṭhimānurūpavaseneva uparimampi saṇṭhitaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dvepi paripuṇṇānī’’ti, tañca kho na sabbaso parimaṇḍalatāya, atha kho tibhāgāvasesamaṇḍalatāyāti āha ‘‘dvādasiyā pakkhassa candasadisānī’’ti. Sallakkhetvāti attano lakkhaṇasatthānusārena upadhāretvā. Dantānaṃ uccanīcatā abbhantarabāhirapassavasenapi veditabbā, na aggavaseneva. Tenāha ‘‘ayapaṭṭakena chinnasaṅkhapaṭalaṃ viyā’’ti. Ayapaṭṭakanti kakacaṃ adhippetaṃ. Samā bhavissanti, na visamā, samasaṇṭhānāti attho.
「广长」(pabhūta):极度柔软、长、广等功德已生起、成就,故称广长;再将 bha 音转为 ha 音,便说为「舌广长者」(pahūtajivho)。显示巴利原文
Sātisayaṃ mududīghaputhulatādippakāraguṇā hutvā bhūtā jātāti pabhūtā, bha-kārassa ha-kāraṃ katvā pahūtā jivhā etassāti pahūtajivho.
「断音」:因其音声之流被一再截断,故称断音。「破音」:因其呈现多种样态,故称破音。「鸦音」:因其如乌鸦般音声不悦耳,故称鸦音。「无滞碍」:指无扰乱之事,而所谓“事”,应知为字母生起之处。「具八支」:此处的“支”后文将说明。「妙音」:即甜美的声音。显示巴利原文
Vicchinditvā vicchinditvā pavattasaratāya chinnassarāpi. Anekākāratāya bhinnassarāpi. Kākassa viya amanuññasaratāya kākassarāpi. Apalibuddhattāti anupaddutavatthukattā, vatthūti ca akkharuppattiṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatoti ettha aṅgāni parato āgamissanti. Mañjughosoti madhurassaro.
「深蓝眼」:谓极为殊胜的蓝眼,此殊胜性当知是蓝色极其显著,而非眼球蓝色本身的增胜,故说“不是全蓝眼”等。黄、红等色,依位于白轮中的脉络而定;蓝、白、黑等色,则当知各依其轮而定。显示巴利原文
Abhinīlanettoti adhikanīlanetto, adhikatā ca sātisayaṃ nīlabhāvena veditabbā, na nettanīlabhāvasseva adhikabhāvatoti āha ‘‘na sakalanīlanetto’’tiādi. Pītalohitavaṇṇā setamaṇḍalagatarājivasena. Nīlasetakāḷavaṇṇā pana taṃtaṃmaṇḍalavaseneva veditabbā.
「眼具」即眼皮,此为一种说法;另有人说为“眼皮之轨迹”。然应连同眼皮理解为眼圆(眼球)。如此,彼向外流出的深幽光耀方称合理。「所意许的」:此明此处意趣乃依“以部分指代全体”之理。以“睫毛”一词世间通称眼皮上之细毛,故说“柔软、细滑、蓝色、纤细之睫毛密布的眼”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Cakkhubhaṇḍanti akkhidala’’nti keci. ‘‘Akkhidalavaṭuma’’nti aññe. Akkhidalehi pana saddhiṃ akkhibimbanti veditabbaṃ. Evañhi viniggatagambhīrajotanāpi yuttā hoti. ‘‘Adhippeta’’nti iminā ayamettha adhippāyo ekadesena samudāyupalakkhaṇañāyenāti dasseti. Yasmā pakhuma-saddo loke akkhidalalomesu niruḷho, tenevāha ‘‘mudusiniddhanīlasukhumapakhumācitāni akkhīnī’’ti.
“白毫”:虽然“白毫”一词在世间通常是毛的泛称,但此处特指一种殊胜之毛,故说“白毫即毛”。“生于眉间”,即长在额头正中。此处是以其洁白性来作譬喻,并非取其柔软性,因为白毫比那更为极其柔软。所以才说“犹如澄清酥油的凝块”等。“银泡”,即银质的星星。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi uṇṇā-saddo loke avisesato lomapariyāyo, idha pana lomavisesavācakoti āha ‘‘uṇṇā loma’’nti. Nalāṭavemajjhejātāti nalāṭamajjhagatā jātā. Odātatāya upamā, na mudutāya . Uṇṇā hi tatopi sātisayaṃ mudutarā. Tenāha‘‘sappi maṇḍe’’tiādi. Rajatapubbuḷakanti rajatamayatārakamāha.
“顶髻头者”是依两种含义而说的:由于佛陀与转轮王皆具有圆满的前额及圆满的头相,故被称为“顶髻头者”,因此依此二种含义说“顶髻头者”。现在为阐明这两种含义,在“大人之额善安立”等处说“大人者”等。以其极为细滑、金色、光辉、圆满故,如同国王所缠的顶髻布条一般闪耀。“猴头”指头部分成两半的头。“果头”指形如果实的头。“骨露头”指因无肉而骨相极度凸显,或因瘦弱只剩皮包骨的头。“葫芦头”指形似葫芦的头。“凸额头”指后脑勺隆突下垂的头。依前面所说的道理,即是以圆满的前额这一方面来说。“犹如顶髻缠裹的头”指就像用顶髻布条缠绕的头部部位。“犹如顶髻”指就像巧匠所造的顶髻圆环。显示巴利原文
Dve atthavase paṭicca vuttanti yasmā buddhā, cakkavattino ca paripuṇṇanalāṭatāya, paripuṇṇasīsabimbatāya ca ‘‘uṇhīsasīsā’’ti vuccanti, tasmā te dve atthavase paṭicca ‘‘uṇhīsasīso’’ti idaṃ vuttaṃ. Idāni taṃ atthadvayaṃ mahāpurise suppatiṭṭhitanti ‘‘mahāpurisassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṇhatamatāya, suvaṇṇavaṇṇatāya, pabhassaratāya, paripuṇṇatāya ca rañño bandhauṇhīsapaṭṭo viya virocati. Kapisīsāti dvidhābhūtasīsā. Phalasīsāti phalitasīsā. Aṭṭhisīsāti maṃsassa abhāvato ativiya aṭṭhitāya, patanubhāvato vā taconaddhaaṭṭhimattasīsā. Tumbasīsāti lābusadisasīsā. Pabbhārasīsāti piṭṭhibhāgena olambamānasīsā. Purimanayenāti paripuṇṇanalāṭatāpakkhena. Uṇhīsaveṭhitasīso viyāti uṇhīsapaṭṭena veṭhitasīsapadeso viya. Uṇhīsaṃ viyāti chekena sippinā viracitauṇhīsamaṇḍalaṃ viya.
毗婆尸佛等共同名称的注释。显示巴利原文
Vipassīsamaññāvaṇṇanā
37 “广说”是指把握相好时,令相师们满意的详尽解说。入胎时作为征相之梦的领受者满意之事,已如前说。“无过失”指远离碱土、盐碱等过失。“保姆”指哺乳的保姆,因其哺育婴儿、喂以乳汁,故称保姆。“如是”一词是承接“六十”一词。其余的保姆,即洗浴者、怀抱者、侍奉者三种。她们因安排沐浴、使人沐浴,以及怀抱等,故也称为“保姆”。其中,怀抱指以胸、腿或手长时间地抱持。侍奉指从他人怀中接过,从他人手臂转手,递相传送。显示巴利原文
37.Tassa vitthāroti tassa lakkhaṇapariggaṇhane nemittakānaṃ santappanassa vitthāro vitthārakathā. Gabbhokkantiyaṃ nimittabhūta supinapaṭiggāhakasantappane vuttoyeva. Niddosenāti khārikaloṇikādidosarahitena. Dhātiyoti thaññapāyikā dhātiyo. Tā hi dhāpenti thaññaṃ pāyentīti dhātiyo.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘saṭṭhi’’nti padaṃ upasaṃharati , sesāpīti nhāpikā, dhārikā, parihārikāti imā tividhā. Tāpi dahanti vidahanti nhānaṃ dahanti dhārentīti ‘‘dhātiyo’’ tveva vuccanti. Tattha dhāraṇaṃ urasā, ūrunā, hatthehi vā suciraṃ velaṃ sandhāraṇaṃ. Pariharaṇaṃ aññassa aṅkato attano aṅkaṃ, aññassa bāhuto attano bāhuṃ upasaṃharantehi haraṇaṃ sampāpanaṃ.
38 「妙音」指柔和的声音。柔和的声音便不粗糙,故说“不粗之音”。「和美音」指令人愉悦的声音。其所以令人愉悦,在于巧妙且与功德相应,故说“善巧微妙之音”。「甘甜音」指听起来悦耳的声音。其所以悦耳,在于极为可意,故说“可乐之音”。「可爱音」指令人喜爱的声音。其所以令人喜爱,是因能令听众生起爱敬,故说“生起爱敬之音”。「迦陵频伽鸟音」:迦陵频伽鸟的音声传入哪类有情的耳中,它们便会因其音声的美妙而忘失自己的本性,被其音声所掌控、所吸引。为显示这样的甘甜,故说“在此”等。其中,“迦陵频伽鸟”等是说明其特性。「嬉戏」指由喜悦冲动所引发的游戏。「舍弃」指心想“连咀嚼也会障碍听闻甘甜的音声”,便将草叶吐出。「不放置」指不放在地上,而让其停在空中。被猛兽追逐的鹿等,因此舍弃了对死亡的恐惧。「舒展羽翼」指让翅膀保持舒展,不落下而停住。显示巴利原文
38.Mañjussaroti saṇhassaro. Yo hi saṇho, so kharo na hotīti āha ‘‘akharassaro’’ti. Vaggussaroti manorammassaro, manorammatā cassa cāturiyane puññayogatoti āha ‘‘chekanipuṇassaro’’ti. Madhurassaroti sotasukhassaro, sotasukhatā cassa ativiya iṭṭhabhāvenāti āha ‘‘sātassaro’’ti. Pemanīyassaroti piyāyitabbassaro, piyāyitabbatā cassa suṇantānaṃ attani bhattisamuppādanenāti āha ‘‘pemajanakassaro’’ti. Karavīkassaroti. Karavīkasaddo yesaṃ sattānaṃ sotapathaṃ upagacchati, te attano sarasampattiyā pakatiṃ jahāpetvā avase karonto attano vase vatteti, evaṃ madhuroti dassento ‘‘tatrida’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘karavīkasakuṇe’’tiādi tassa sabhāvakathanaṃ. Laḷitanti pītivegasamuṭṭhitaṃ līḷaṃ. Chaḍḍetvāti ‘‘saṅkharaṇampi madhurasaddasavanantarāyakara’’nti tiṇāni apanetvā. Anikkhipitvāti bhūmiyaṃ anikkhipitvā ākāsagatameva katvā. Anubaddhamigā vāḷamigehi. Tato maraṇabhayaṃ hitvā. Pakkhe pasāretvāti pakkhe yathāpasārite katvā apatantā tiṭṭhanti.
放出金笼,是因它在高达一由旬的空中,依国王的命令而行。因此说“那位国王命令”等。“嬉戏”指开始嬉戏。那喜,是以佛陀功德为所缘的喜悦,以同样的方式反复生起的喜悦;他们不舍离此喜,伏断烦恼,在长老们跟前获得听闻佛法的方便,由于亲依止成就,智慧成熟,经七日而安住。与七百位宫人一同步行前往长老们之处,故说“与七百位步行者在一起”。从那里,从迦陵频伽鸟音的音声……。百倍……当知,这是由于并非在十万劫中所积累的功德资粮所能产生的成就之状态。显示巴利原文
Suvaṇṇapañjaraṃ vissajjesi yojanappamāṇe ākāse attano āṇāya pavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘so rājāṇāyā’’tiādi. Laḷiṃsūti laḷitaṃ kātuṃ ārabhiṃsu. Taṃ pītinti taṃ buddhaguṇārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ teneva nīhārena punappunaṃ pavattaṃ pītiṃ avijahitvā vikkhambhitakilesā therānaṃ santike laddhadhammassavanasappāyā upanissayasampattiyā paripakkañāṇatāya sattahi…pe… patiṭṭhāsi. Sattasatamattena orodhajanena saddhiṃ padasāva therānaṃ santikaṃ upagatattā ‘‘sattahi jaṅghasatehi saddhi’’nti vuttaṃ. Tatoti karavīkasaddato. Satabhāgena…pe… veditabbo anekakappakoṭisatasambhūtapuññasambhārasamudāgatavatthusampattibhāvato.
39 「业果所生」指由极殊胜的善行业所产生,不为胆汁、痰、血等所障碍,能够领纳远处的所缘,与业果俱生,或由业的果报而生起的净眼。天眼有两种:业所成和修习所成。其中,此是业所成,故说“非修习所成”。修习所成的天眼,将在菩提树下生起。此处“他”的了别,虽由意识进行,但因眼识对此明了,意识便于彼处如此转起,因此说“依彼相……能作”。显示巴利原文
39.Kammavipākajanti sātisayasucaritakammanibbattaṃ pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ dūrepi ārammaṇaṃ sampaṭicchanasamatthaṃ kammavipākena sahajātaṃ, kammassa vā vipākabhāvena jātaṃ pasādacakkhu. Duvidhañhi dibbacakkhuṃ kammamayaṃ, bhāvanāmayanti. Tatridaṃ kammamayanti āha ‘‘na bhāvanāmaya’’nti. Bhāvanāmayaṃ pana bodhimūle uppajjissati. Ayaṃ ‘‘so’’ti sallakkhaṇaṃ kāmaṃ manoviññāṇena hoti, cakkhuviññāṇena pana tassa tathā vibhāvitattā manoviññāṇassa tattha tathāpavattīti āha ‘‘yena nimittaṃ…pe… sakkotī’’ti.
40 “词义”即语言的含义。“闭眼”是指闭眼观看并不清净,正如眼睛未睁开时,闭眼所见的状况不净。与此相反,睁眼观看则是清净的,所以称为“时而”等。显示巴利原文
40.Vacanatthoti saddattho. Nimīlananti nimīlanadassanaṃ navisuddhaṃ, tathā ca akkhīni avivaṭāni nimīladassanassa na visuddhibhāvato. Tabbipariyāyato pana dassanaṃ visuddhaṃ, vivaṭañcāti āha ‘‘antarantarā’’tiādi.
41 词根“nī-”:取其“知道”的含义,故说“引导即了知”。正如所说“诸无相者不可知”,以及“智者当知人中最胜者所说”。又取词根“nī-”的“转起”含义,说“引导即令转起”。他于种种应作之事中,成为不放逸者。显示巴利原文
41. Nī-iti – jānanatthaṃ dhātuṃ gahetvā āha ‘‘panayati jānātī’’ti. Yato vuttaṃ ‘‘animittā na nāyare’’ti (visuddhi. 1.174; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.20), ‘‘vidūbhi neyyaṃ naravarassā’’ti (netti. saṅgahavāra) ca. Nī-iti pana pavattanatthaṃ dhātuṃ gahetvā ‘‘nayati pavattetī’’ti. Appamatto ahosi tesu tesu kiccakaraṇīyesu.
42 “雨季住所”省略后分而成为“雨季”;因此,适合在雨季或于雨季中舒适共住的,便称为“雨季的”,指那座宫殿。而月份因处于雨季时节,故称“雨季的”。其余的“冬季的”“夏季的”也是如此。同理,这也是以省略后分的方式来作解释。显示巴利原文
42. Vassāvāso vassaṃ uttarapadalopena, tasmā vassaṃ, vasse vā, sannivāsaphāsutāya arahatīti vassiko, pāsādo. Māsā pana vasse utumhi bhavāti vassikā. Itaresūti hemantikaṃ gimhikanti imesu. Eseva nayoti uttarapadalopena niddesaṃ atidisati.
「不过高、也不过低」:不像夏季那样高,也不像冬季那样低,而是兼具两者的中间特征,因此不过高,也不过低。对于这座宫殿,「其窗不过多」:不像夏季宫殿那样过多。「其窗不过少」:不像冬季宫殿那样又小,窗网又稀。这些窗是「混合的」:不像冬季宫殿那样只有暖房,也不像夏季宫殿那样只有凉房,而是两者兼具。它们「单薄」:并不粗厚。「为热气进入」:是为了让太阳的炎热透进来。「南侧墙壁上的壁龛等」:指南面墙壁上的壁龛之类。「柔滑」:是有光泽的意思;说它柔滑,实际上也包含了厚重、高档的意味。「辛辣所附」:指与三辛等辛辣药材相关。「出水装置」:是指能流出水流的装置。就像有喷水装置一样,那里也造了出雪的装置。因此应当知道,如同冬季一般,会有雪花飘落下来。显示巴利原文
Nātiucco hoti nātinīcoti gimhiko viya ucco, hemantiko viya nīco na hoti, atha kho tadubhayavemajjhalakkhaṇatāya nātiucco hoti, nātinīco. Assāti pāsādassa. Nātibahūnīti gimhikassa viya na atibahūni. Nātitanūnīti hemantikassa viya na khuddakāni, tanutarajālāni ca. Missakānevāti hemantike viya na uṇhaniyāneva, gimhike viya ca na sītaniyāneva, atha kho ubhayamissakāneva. Tanukānīti na puthulāni. Uṇhappavesanatthāyāti sūriyasantāpānuppavesāya. Bhittiniyūhānīti dakkhiṇapasse bhittīsu niyūhāni. Siniddhanti sinehavantaṃ, siniddhaggahaṇeneva cassa garukatāpi vuttā eva. Kaṭukasannissitanti tikaṭukādikaṭukadrabbūpasañhitaṃ. Udakayantānīti udakadhārāvissandayantāni. Yathā jalayantāni, evaṃ himayantānipi tattha karonti eva. Tasmā hemante viya himāni patantāniyeva hontīti ca veditabbaṃ.
「所有场所」:指一切整理、沐浴、进食、游戏、散步等场所,并不只是居住之处。因此经文说「守门人等」。此处更说明理由:「据说国王」等等。显示巴利原文
Sabbaṭṭhānānipīti sabbāni paṭikiriyānhānabhojanakīḷāsañcaraṇādiṭṭhānānipi, na nivāsaṭṭhānāniyeva. Tenāha ‘‘dovārikāpī’’tiādi. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘rājā kirā’’tiādi.
老人相注释显示巴利原文
Jiṇṇapurisavaṇṇanā
44 「如弯曲椽」:指如同弯曲的椽子。为了显示弯曲事物的弯曲性,连不弯曲的椽子也被用来比喻。「身曲」:由于身体从一开始便隆曲不直,因此说是身曲。所以经文提到「肩」等。「杖为依」:他的行走以持杖为要务,故称杖为依;或说杖是他向前行进的原因,因此是杖为依。「杖为行」:在站立等活动中,杖是他的归向与依靠,没有杖便无法活动;或者,「行」指凭借其行走,杖即是能使其行走的原因,故称杖为行。「杖为皈依」也是同样的道理。「为老所苦」:指被衰老折磨,身心疲惫,不能自主。「当车在前时」:遇到岔路时,前方行进的军队登上一处高地,而菩萨所乘、在中间行进的车则驶向另一处高地,此时车跑到了前面,所有军队都落在了后方。「在这样的地方」:即指上述那种情况。显示巴利原文
44.Gopānasivaṅkanti vaṅkagopānasī viya. Vaṅkānañhi vaṅkabhāvassa nidassanatthaṃ avaṅkagopānasīpi gayhati. Ābhoggavaṅkanti ādito paṭṭhāya abbhuggatāya kuṭilasarīratāya vaṅkaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khandhe’’tiādi. Daṇḍaparaṃ daṇḍaggahaṇaparaṃ ayanaṃ gamanaṃ etassāti daṇḍaparāyanaṃ, daṇḍo vā paraṃ āyanaṃ gamanakāraṇaṃ etassāti daṇḍaparāyanaṃ. Ṭhānādīsu daṇḍo gati avassayo etassa tena vinā appavattanatoti daṇḍagatikaṃ, gacchati etenāti vā gati, daṇḍo gati gamanakāraṇaṃ etassāti daṇḍagatikaṃ. Daṇḍapaṭisaraṇanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Jarāturanti jarāya kilantaṃ assavasaṃ. Yadā ratho purato hotīti dvedhāpathe sampatte purato gacchante balakāye tattha ekaṃ saṇṭhānaṃ āruḷho majjhe gacchanto bodhisattena āruḷho ratho itaraṃ saṇṭhānaṃ gacchanto yadā purato hoti. Pacchā balakāyoti tadā pacchā hoti sabbo balakāyo. Tādise okāseti tādise vuttappakāre maggappadese. Taṃ purisanti taṃ jiṇṇapurisaṃ. Suddhāvāsāti siddhatthādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ sāsane brahmacariyaṃ caritvā suddhāvāsabhūmiyaṃ nibbattabrahmāno. Te hi tadā tattha tiṭṭhanti. ‘‘Kiṃ paneso jiṇṇo nāmā’’ti eso tayā vuccamāno kiṃ atthato, taṃ me niddhāretvā kathehīti dasseti. Aniddhāritasarūpattā hi tassa attano bodhisatto liṅgasabbanāmena taṃ vadanto ‘‘ki’’nti āha. ‘‘Yathā kiṃ te jāta’’nti dvayameva hi loke yebhuyyato jāyati itthī vā puriso vā, tathāpi taṃ liṅgasabbanāmena vuccati, evaṃ sampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Kiṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādi tassa aniddhāritasarūpataṃyeva vibhāveti.
“若是如此”等语,是显示菩萨生起警觉的心念:“这个老态,一切众生共有,将来也必定会降临到我头上。”
“驾车者”即指御者。
“园林”:为了游戏、休闲而前往游观之处,称为园林。
“alam”是一个表示拒绝的词。
“nāma”是表示呵责的不变词,如“云何名……”等句中的用法。
为了观察出生的过患,如同要铲除其根本——因为老正是出生的必然结果,所以说“他坐着铲除出生的根本”。原因具足时,结果自然成立。
他坐下时,如同胸口被第一支箭射中:那箭生起苦逼,以刺入内部的方式,最先渗入并停驻在心脏上。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena hī’’tiādi ‘‘ayañca jiṇṇabhāvo sabbasādhāraṇattā mayhampi upari āpattito evā’’ti mahāsattassa saṃvijjanākāravibhāvanaṃ. Rathaṃ sāretīti sārathi. Kīḷāvihāratthaṃ uyyuttā yanti upagacchanti etanti uyyānaṃ. Alanti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Nāmāti garahaṇe nipāto ‘‘kathañhināmā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 39, 42, 87, 88, 90, 166, 170; pāci. 1, 13, 36) viya. Jātiyā ādīnavadassanatthaṃ taṃmūlassa ummūlanaṃ viya hotīti, tassa ca avassitabhāvato ‘‘jātiyā mūlaṃkhaṇanto nisīdī’’ti āha. Siddhe hi kāraṇe phalaṃ siddhameva hotīti. Pīḷaṃ janetvā antotudanavasena sabbapaṭhamaṃ hadayaṃ anupavissa ṭhitattā paṭhamena sallena hadayeviddho viya nisīdīti yojanā.
病人相注释显示巴利原文
Byādhipurisavaṇṇanā
47 “如前所述的方法”:即依前面所说的道理,如“净居天据说……”那一段,用的是同样的解释方式。
“有病者”:指患病之人。
“苦者”:指已生起痛苦的人。
“未生”:指未生的状态,或指涅槃。显示巴利原文
47.Pubbevuttanayenevāti ‘‘suddhāvāsā kirā’’tiādinā pubbe vutteneva nayena. Ābādhikanti ābādhavantaṃ. Dukkhitanti sañjātadukkhaṃ. Ajātanti ajātabhāvo, nibbānaṃ vā.
「死者注疏(Kālakatapurisavaṇṇanā)」,就是对死者的注释。显示巴利原文
Kālakatapurisavaṇṇanā
50 “以破碎、弯曲的花等”:指用这些花做成各种装饰后可被取用之物,故称为车乘、轿子。因此说“vilāta”即指轿子。
菩萨以前曾见过轿子,所以把柴堆叫作“轿子”。
“从此离去”:指从此生离去。
“已作终”:指寿尽命终。
因此他接着说“yattaka(多少)”等词。显示巴利原文
50. Bhantanettakuppalādi vividhaṃ katvā lātabbato vilāto, vayhaṃ, sivikā cāti āha ‘‘vilātanti sivika’’nti. Sivikāya diṭṭhapubbattā mahāsatto citakapañjaraṃ ‘‘sivika’’nti āha. Ito paṭigatanti ito bhavato apagataṃ . Katakālanti pariyosāpitajīvanakālaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yattaka’’ntiādi.
「出家者注疏(Pabbajitavaṇṇanā)」,就是对出家者的注释。显示巴利原文
Pabbajitavaṇṇanā
53 “行法者”(dhammaṃ caratīti),即奉行法的人,称为“法行者”(dhammacaraṇo),其状态为“法行状态”(dhammacaraṇabhāva),所指的就是“法行”(dhammacariya)本身。对每一个词都应如此连接:就如“善法行即出家者”这句的连接,同样地,“善等行即出家者”等,应明白每一个词的连接方式。“所有”是指在“善法行”等短语中出现的“法、等、善、福”等词。而“十善业道的同义词”,是指布施等十种善法的异名。显示巴利原文
53. Dhammaṃ caratīti dhammacaraṇo, tassa bhāvo dhammacaraṇabhāvoti dhammacariyameva vadati. Evaṃ ekekassa padassāti yathā ‘‘sādhudhammacariyāti pabbajito’’ti yojanā, evaṃ ‘‘sādhusamacariyāti pabbajito’’tiādinā ekekassa padassa yojanā veditabbā. Sabbānīti ‘‘sādhudhammacariyā’’tiādīsu āgatāni sabbāni dhammasamakusalapuññapadāni. Dasakusalakammapathavevacanānīti dānādīni dasakusaladhammapariyāyapadāni.
「菩萨出家注疏(Bodhisattapabbajjāvaṇṇanā)」,是对菩萨出家的注释。显示巴利原文
Bodhisattapabbajjāvaṇṇanā
54 “听闻出家人所说的法语”——这是词句的连接关系。此外,他当时所说、未收入结集的法语,也应一起连接。“vaṃsovā”等三个词,是在表明这是自然的法则。由于是长寿者,所以很久才能见到一次。正如经文所说:“经过许多年……之后”。正因如此,他并不是时隔很久才见到。为了显示前一世的灭去并不久远,他说:“见衰老……见出家者后,我因此出家成为国王”,这就像说“沐浴、穿衣、涂香、戴花、饮食”一样。显示巴利原文
54. Pabbajitassa dhammiṃ kathaṃ sutvāti sambandho. Aññañca saṅgītianāruḷhaṃ tena tadā vuttaṃ dhammiṃ kathanti yojanā. ‘‘Vaṃsovā’’ti padattayena dhammatā esāti dasseti. Cirassaṃ cirassaṃ passanti dīghāyukabhāvato. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘bahūnaṃ vassānaṃ…pe… accayenā’’ti. Tenevāti na cirassaṃ diṭṭhabhāveneva. Acirakālantarikameva pubbakālakiriyaṃ dassento ‘‘jiṇṇañca disvā…pe… pabbajitañca disvā, tasmā ahaṃ pabbajitomhi rājā’’ti āha yathā ‘‘nhatvā vatthaṃ paridahitvā gandhaṃ vilimpitvā mālaṃ piḷandhitvā bhutto’’ti.
「大众随出家注疏(Mahājanakāyaanupabbajjāvaṇṇanā)」,是对大众跟随出家的注释。显示巴利原文
Mahājanakāyaanupabbajjāvaṇṇanā
55 “为何在这里”等语句,显示了那八万四千众生与菩萨的亲密关系,以及他们心中充满的悚惧。他们就在闻法之处,未向任何亲友告别,犹如一头醉象挣断坚固的铁链,径直走向了出家。显示巴利原文
55.‘‘Kasmāpanetthā’’tiādinā tesaṃ caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ mahāsatte saṃbhattataṃ, saṃvegabahulatañca dasseti, yato sutaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhatvā ñātimittādīsu kiñci anāmantetvā mattavaravāraṇo viya ayomayabandhanaṃ ghanabandhanaṃ chinditvā pabbajjaṃ upagacchiṃsu.
他游行四个月,因为当时智慧尚未成熟。显示巴利原文
Cattāro māse cārikaṃ cari na tāva ñāṇassa paripākaṃ gatattā.
当智慧成熟时,为显示此境界,便说了“而这一位……”等语。他的用意是:“所有这些出家人都会知道我将离去,知道后便会跟随而来。”“集会群中”意指聚集共坐的人群。“似在鸣响”意为如同鸣响,发出声音。显示巴利原文
Yadā pana ñāṇaṃ paripākaṃ gataṃ, taṃ dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Sabbeva ime pabbajitā mama gamanaṃ jānissanti, jānantā ca maṃ anubandhissantīti adhippāyo. Sannisīvesūti sannisinnesu. Saṇatevāti saṇati viya saddaṃ karoti viya.
“不乐远离者”指不喜远离的人。“此时”指那些出家人尚不知我将离去的时刻。“出离之后”指从叶屋出来后;然而大出离在清晨即已出发。凭波罗蜜之力,上空由诸天以天界敷具善加铺设,但亦因菩萨的福力所成就,故说“铺设了结跏趺座”,如同施设出来的一般。他决意了如“即使皮、筋、骨残留……”等经中所说的四支精进。“修远离住”即修习远离之住。显示巴利原文
Avivekārāmānanti anabhirativivekānaṃ. Ayaṃ kāloti ayaṃ tesaṃ pabbajitānaṃ mama gamanassa ajānanakālo. Nikkhamitvāti paṇṇasālāya niggantvā, mahābhinikkhamanaṃ pana pageva nikkhanto. Pāramitānubhāvena uṭṭhitaṃ upari devatāhi dibbapaccattharaṇehi supaññattampi mahāsattassa puññānubhāvena siddhattā tena paññattaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pallaṅkaṃ paññapetvā’’ti. ‘‘Kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatū’’tiādi (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22, 237; a. ni. 2.5; 8.13; mahāni. 17, 196) nayappavattaṃ caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā. Vūpakāsanti vivekavāsaṃ.
“向另一方向”指大人当时所住之处以外的方向。虽然菩提道场位于赡部洲中央的脐位,但那时这片区域是广大的森林,远离人烟,适宜瑜伽行者隐居。而赡部洲的其他地方,则大多人众稠密、富饶繁荣。因此,他们说的“朝向赡部洲境内游行而去”,意思是朝着赡部洲境内的方向,而不是朝着雪山等山的方向。显示巴利原文
Aññenevāti yattha mahāpuriso tadā viharati, tato aññeneva disābhāgena. Kāmaṃ bodhimaṇḍo jambudīpassa majjhe nābhiṭṭhāniyo, tadā pana brahāraññe vivitte yogīnaṃ paṭisallānasāruppo hutvā tiṭṭhati, tadañño pana jambudīpappadeso yebhuyyena bahujano ākiṇṇamanusso iddho phīto ahosi. Tena te taṃ taṃ janapadadesaṃ uddissa gatā ‘‘anto jambudīpābhimukhā cārikaṃ pakkantā’’ti vuttā anto jambudīpābhimukhā, na himavantādipabbatābhimukhāti attho.
菩萨倾向的注释显示巴利原文
Bodhisattaabhinivesavaṇṇanā
57 57. 虽然世尊成佛后确实在那里度过了七个七日,但这里的说法最初是针对毗舍佉月的满月日,而说“他接近了一夜之住”。“独处者”指到达了远离人群的寂静处,以此说明菩萨因无大众聚集之喧嚣而获得身远离。“隐居者”指心从种种所缘的游移中退转,正确地隐居其中,心不散乱,以此说明因无心之喧嚣而获得前分的心远离。“苦”就是以生等为根本的苦。虽然死与再生也就是生和死,但在说“生、死”之后,又说“死、再生”,这并不是指同一生中所包含的,而是指不同生中所包含的,为总括而显示这一对,故说为“……”。为什么在遍寻世间苦迫时,要依老死而确定说为“老死”呢?为解释这一点,所以说“因为……”等。意思是“老死最先现起,成为端绪”。“倾向”是指已经开始精勤。以缘起之门开始观时,他对老死的倾向,就像从顶端向下到达根本,所以称为“犹如从有顶向下顺行一般”。显示巴利原文
57. Kāmaṃ bhagavā buddho hutvā sattasattāhāni tattheva vasi, sabbapaṭhamaṃ pana visākhapuṇṇamaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekarattivāsaṃ upagatassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Rahogatassāti raho janavivittaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatassa, tena gaṇasaṅgaṇikābhāvena mahāsattassa kāyavivekamāha. Paṭisallīnassāti nānārammaṇacārato cittassa nivattiyā pati sammadeva nilīnassa tattha avisaṭacittassa, tena cittasaṅgaṇikābhāvenassa pubbabhāgiyaṃ cittavivekamāha. Dukkhanti jātiādimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ. Kāmaṃ cutūpapātāpi jātimaraṇāni eva, maraṇajātiyova ‘‘jāyati mīyatī’’ti pana vatvā ‘‘cavati upapajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ na ekabhavapariyāpannānaṃ nesaṃ gahaṇaṃ, atha kho nānābhavapariyāpannānaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahaṇanti dassento āha ‘‘idaṃ dvayaṃ…pe… vutta’’nti. Kasmā pana lokassa kicchāpattiparivitakkane ‘‘jarāmaraṇassā’’ti jarāmaraṇavasena niyamanaṃ katanti āha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi. Jarāmaraṇameva upaṭṭhāti āditoti adhippāyo. Abhiniviṭṭhassāti āraddhassa. Paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanārambhe tassa jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya abhiniveso aggato yāva mūlaṃ otaraṇaṃ viyāti āha ‘‘bhavaggato otarantassa viyā’’ti.
“方便作意”:即通过方便而作意,也就是作意的生起。现在,为了显示那名为“方便作意”的如理作意的自性与生起方式,而说“无常等”等语句。所谓如理作意,就是如实作意。“无常等”的“等”字含摄了苦、无我、不净等。“此”指如“他这么想”中所说的,以“当有什么存在时”等方法生起的作意。“其中任一”是指那些无常等作意中的任何一个。是哪一个呢?就是无常作意,这里说明理由:“由于是以生灭随观的力用而生起”。凡是生而复灭的,就是无常,因其为生灭所限定,故非恒常。而那了知此无常性的观,由于是如实作意,所以是如理作意。“从此如理作意”是原因中的从格,因此用“以此方便作意”这种原因具格来解释它的意义。“会遇”是指以如实通达的方式相会。“那又是什么呢?”意思是“那老死的原因是什么呢?”于是说“生”。在“以生为缘”等句子中,其要义是:菩萨在把握老死之因——“当有什么存在时,老死存在?以什么为缘而有老死?”时,这样把握到了决定不变的原因:“当那个存在时,这个就存在;当那个不存在时,这个也不存在,这就是它的原因。”显示巴利原文
Upāyamanasikārāti upāyena manasikaraṇato manasikārassa pavattanato. Idāni taṃ upāyamanasikārapariyāyaṃ yonisomanasikāraṃ sarūpato, pavattiākārato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘aniccādīni hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yonisomanasikāro nāma hotīti yāthāvato manasikārabhāvato. Aniccādīnīti ādi-saddena dukkhānattaasubhādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Ayanti ‘‘etadahosī’’ti evaṃ vutto ‘‘kimhi nu kho satī’’tiādinayappavatto manasikāro. Tesaṃ aññataroti tesu aniccādimanasikāresu aññataro eko. Ko pana soti? Aniccamanasikārova, tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘udayabbayānupassanāvasena pavattattā’’ti. Yañhi uppajjati ceva cavati ca, taṃ aniccaṃ udayavayaparicchinnattā addhuvanti katvā. Tassa pana tabbhāvadassanaṃ yāthāvamanasikāratāya yonisomanasikāro . Ito yonisomanasikārāti hetumhi nissakkavacananti tassa iminā ‘‘upāyamanasikārenā’’ti hetumhi karaṇavacanena atthamāha. Samāgamo ahosīti yāthāvato paṭivijjhanavasena saṅgamo ahosi. Kiṃ pana tanti kiṃ pana taṃ jarāmaraṇakāraṇanti āha ‘‘jātī’’ti. ‘‘Jātiyā kho’’tiādīsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, kiṃ paccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti jarāmaraṇakāraṇaṃ pariggaṇhantassa bodhisattassa ‘‘yasmiṃ sati yaṃ hoti, asati ca na hoti, taṃ tassa kāraṇa’’nti evaṃ abyabhicārikāraṇapariggaṇhane ‘‘jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti yā jarāmaraṇassa kāraṇapariggāhikā paññā uppajjati, tāya uppajjantiyā samāgamo ahosīti. Sabbapadānīti ‘‘kimhi nu kho sati jāti hotī’’tiādinā āgatāni jātiādīni viññāṇapariyosānāni nava padāni.
在这十二支缘起中,有哪两支未被把握?先提出这个问题,询问不把握的原因,再予解答,同时说明应如何把握它们。因此说「然而在这里……」等。先将显而易见、现前存在的「现在世」把握住,之后才把握未来,称为「第二」。在把握未来之后,过去就成了第三。所以说:「无明与行即是过去世」。有人问:难道未来世不是也无法把握吗?因为经文已表明,倾向是以现在为主的。确实如此,但应这样理解:当因被把握时,果实际上也已被把握了,才这样说。而且,在此处,未来的时域在意义上也被含摄在内,因为后面还有「以名色为缘而有六处」等包含未来世的说法。「由他们」这一句中的「他们」,指的是作为所缘的无明与行。「不关涉、不联系」,意思是不与它们关联、结合。这是因为大人是以现在世为主要对象而生起倾向的,这就说明了不关涉的原因。「未见的」意思是未被觉了、未被通达,这里是表示状态的具格。在觉了的时候,理应有通达,所以说「不可能成为觉者」。由这位大人所见的无明与行,仅是依于对有、取、爱的观察而照见的,因为它们与那些有……显示巴利原文
Dvādasapadike paṭiccasamuppāde idha yāni dve padāni aggahitāni, tesaṃ aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ pucchitvā vissajjetukāmo tesaṃ gahetabbākāraṃ tāva dassento ‘‘ettha panā’’tiādimāha. Paccakkhabhūtaṃ paccuppannabhavaṃ paṭhamaṃ gahetvā tadanantaraṃ anāgataṃ ‘‘dutiya’’nti gahaṇe atīto tatiyo hotīti āha ‘‘avijjā saṅkhārā hi atīto bhavo’’ti. Nanu cettha anāgatassāpi bhavassa gahaṇaṃ na sambhavati paccuppannavasena abhinivesassa jotitattāti? Saccametaṃ, kāraṇe pana gahite phalaṃ gahitameva hotīti tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Api cettha anāgatopi addhā atthato saṅgahito eva, yato parato ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’ntiādinā anāgataddhasaṅgahikā desanā pavattā. Tehīti avijjāsaṅkhārehi ārammaṇabhūtehi. Na ghaṭiyati na sambajjhati. Mahāpuriso hi paccuppannavasena abhiniviṭṭhoti aghaṭane kāraṇamāha. Adiṭṭhehīti anavabuddhehi, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Sati anubodhe paṭivedhena bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘nasakkā buddhena bhavitu’’nti. Imināti mahāsattena. Teti avijjāsaṅkhārā. Bhavaupādānataṇhāvasenevāti bhavaupādānataṇhādassanavaseneva. Diṭṭhā taṃsabhāvataṃsahagatehi tehi samānayogakkhamattā. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.570) kathitāva, tasmā na idha kathetabbāti adhippāyo.
58 「缘」的意思就是「因由」,即从行的意义来说。因为在「当有什么存在时,老死存在?」等探究中,是顺着因的相续来阐述果的相续的。在「当有什么存在时,识存在?」的探究中,假若作为识之特殊原因的「行」未被把握,识便会从那「行」退转——这里的退转,并非从所有缘退转。正因如此,才会说:「当名色存在时,识存在」。在这里,名也是指以俱生等方式作为缘,而不是以业为依止的方式,因为经文已表明,倾向是以现在为主的。「从所缘」这句话,意思是「从名为无明和行的所缘」,或者「从名为过去世的所缘」。因为无明与行是隶属于过去时域的。当识退转时,也就是从过去世退转。「两者」是指「结生识」与「观识」。「不超出名色」意思是,识不会超出作为缘和作为所缘的名色,因为没有名色,识就无法转起。因此说「不超出名色而更往他处去」。显示巴利原文
58.Paccayatoti hetuto, saṅkhāratoti attho. ‘‘Kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hotī’’tiādinā hi hetuparamparāvasena phalaparamparāya vuccamānāya ‘‘kimhi nu kho sati viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti vicāraṇāya ‘‘saṅkhāre kho sati viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti viññāṇassa visesakāraṇabhūte saṅkhāre aggahite tato viññāṇaṃ paṭinivattati nāma, na sabbapaccayato. Tenevāha ‘‘nāmarūpe kho sati viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.58), nāmampi cettha sahajātādivaseneva paccayabhūtaṃ adhippetaṃ, na kammūpanissayavasena paccuppannavasena abhinivisassa jotitattā. Ārammaṇatoti avijjāsaṅkhārasaṅkhātaārammaṇato, atītabhavasaṅkhātaārammaṇato vā. Atītaddhapariyāpannā hi avijjāsaṅkhārā. Yato paṭinivattamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ atītabhavatopi paṭinivattati nāma. Ubhayampīti paṭisandhiviññāṇampi vipassanāviññāṇampi. Nāmarūpaṃ nātikkamatīti paccayabhūtaṃ, ārammaṇabhūtañca nāmarūpaṃ nātikkamati tena vinā avattanato. Tenāha ‘‘nāmarūpato paraṃ na gacchatī’’ti.
「当识成为名色的缘时」这句话,是指当识成为名的缘、成为色的缘、成为名色的缘时。同样地,「当名色成为识的缘时」,是指当名、当色、当名色成为识的缘时。这要根据具体情况,依照四蕴有、一蕴有、五蕴有等不同的生命形态来理解其中的联系。而「当这两者互为缘时」这一句,则是纯粹就五蕴有来说的。就是这样,凭借识与名色相互支持而转起,「或者生起……乃至……再生」,才有了「有情出生……乃至……有情再生」这样的称呼。这是因为,并没有一个能脱离识与名色而被称为「有情」的实法存在。因此说「由此……等」。就是这个,指的便是识与名色这二者而已。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇe nāmarūpassa paccaye honteti viññāṇe nāmassa, rūpassa, nāmarūpassa ca paccaye honte. Nāmarūpe ca viññāṇassa paccaye honteti tathā nāme, rūpe, nāmarūpe ca viññāṇassa paccaye honteti catuvokāraekavokārapañcavokārabhavavasena yathārahaṃ yojanā veditabbā, dvīsupi aññamaññapaccayesu hontesūti pana pañcavokārabhavavaseneva. Ettakenāti evaṃ viññāṇa nāmarūpānaṃ aññamaññaṃ upatthambhanavasena pavattiyā. Jāyetha vā…pe… upapajjetha vāti ‘‘satto jāyati…pe… upapajjati vā’’ti samaññā hoti viññāṇanāmarūpavinimuttassa sattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtassa dhammassa abhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘ito hī’’tiādi. Etadevāti viññāṇaṃ, nāmarūpanti etaṃ dvayameva.
「五句」即「或者生起」等五句。其实,此处第一、第三句与第四、第五句在意义上并无不同,所以说「伴随着辗转的死与结生」。接着,为了将「到此为止」所表述的义理——也就是先前用「到此为止」一词所说的如理——以「即此」等语重新导出、例示,再说一遍。「以顺缘相的方式」是说,先见缘法、后见缘所生法。因为缘法对于自己所生的缘所生法具有的缘性,这就是「此缘性」、「缘相」,这在「以无明为缘而有行」等中已经说过。由于它随顺轮回的流转,故为「顺缘相」。以摄集的心总括并把握生等一切轮回之苦,在圣典中被称为「苦蕴的集起」,因此说「生……苦蕴的」。显示巴利原文
Pañca padānīti ‘‘jāyetha vā’’tiādīni pañca padāni. Nanu tattha paṭhamatatiyehi catutthapañcamāni atthato abhinnānīti āha ‘‘saddhiṃ aparāparaṃ cutipaṭisandhīhī’’ti. Puna taṃ ettāvatāti vuttamatthanti yo ‘‘ettāvatā’’ti padena pubbe vutto, tameva yathāvuttamatthaṃ ‘‘yadida’’ntiādinā niyyātento nidassento puna vatvā. Anulomapaccayākāravasenāti paccayadhammadassanapubbakaṃ paccayuppannadhammadassanavasena. Paccayadhammānañhi attano paccayuppannassa paccayabhāvo idappaccayatā paccayākāro, so ca ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā vutto. Saṃsārappavattiyā anulomanato anulomapaccayākāro. Jātiādikaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ cittena samihitena kataṃ samūhavasena gahetvā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dukkhakkhandhassā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘jāti…pe… dukkharāsissā’’ti.
59 为了反复观察苦蕴之集,生起了对识等的了知,故说出重叠语「集、集」。或者,「集是这样出现的」这句话并不仅显示生起之词,而是如同「缘起」一词以和合生起为入口表示缘的状态,此处的「集」词也以生起为入口表示缘的状态。这里将现存的识等指示为缘法,他以总相把握它们,为了说明而说「集、集」。如此之后,接着说的「讲『此有故彼有』,仅是对缘的认知」这句话便得到了很好的支持。如果这样,那「观生起的慧是明」这句话又如何理解?这并没有过失,因为通过以缘的方式观察生起为入口,可以观察生起之相。由于见的意义,称为「眼」:即因为对集有现前观察的状态,如同眼睛,故为眼。由于使知的意义:即如同集被正确地了知、觉了,这样成就的意义。由于了知的意义:即「由于识等的种种缘而生起,这就是苦蕴的集」,从各方面了知的意义。由于穿透、通达而后生起的意义:即之前未能穿透,而以观生起的慧穿透了对立面之法后,以「这是集」的方式,从缘、刹那和自性上通达而生起的状态。由于穿透的意义。显示巴利原文
59. Dukkhakkhandhassa anekavāraṃ samudayadassanavasena viññāṇassa pavattattā ‘‘samudayo samudayo’’ti āmeḍitavacanaṃ avoca. Atha vā ‘‘evaṃ samudayo hotī’’ti idaṃ na kevalaṃ nibbattinidassanapadaṃ, atha kho paṭiccasamuppāda-saddo viya samuppādamukhena idha samudaya-saddo nibbattimukhena paccayattaṃ vadati. Viññāṇādayo bhavantā idha paccayadhammā niddiṭṭhā, te sāmaññarūpena byāpanicchāvasena gaṇhanto ‘‘samudayo samudayo’’ti āha, evañca katvā yaṃ vakkhati ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti paccayasañjānanamattaṃ kathita’’nti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.59) taṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘udayadassanapaññā vesā’’ti idaṃ kathanti? Nāyaṃ doso paccayato udayadassanamukhena nibbattilakkhaṇadassanassa sambhavato. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūti samudayassa paccakkhato dassanabhāvena cakkhu viyāti cakkhu. Ñātakaraṇaṭṭhenāti yathā samudayo sammadeva ñāto hoti avabuddho, evaṃ karaṇaṭṭhena. Pajānanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘viññāṇāditaṃtaṃpaccayuppattiyā etassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti pakārato jānanaṭṭhena. Nibbijjhitvā paṭivijjhitvā uppannaṭṭhenāti anibbijjhitvā pubbe udayadassanapaññāya paṭipakkhadhamme nibbijjhitvā ‘‘ayaṃ samudayo’’ti paccayato, khaṇato ca, sarūpato paṭivijjhitvā uppannabhāvena, nibbijjhanaṭṭhena paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena vijjāti vuttaṃ hoti. Obhāsaṭṭhenāti samudayasabhāvapaṭicchādanakassa mohandhakārassa ca kilesandhakārassa ca vidhamanavasena avabhāsakabhāvena.
现在,为了依次阐明前文所说之义,而说「如所说」等。其中,「眼生起了」是经中摘出的词句。若问「如何生起?」,则答「由于见的意义」。「由于对集的现前观察的状态」,此义已说明。依此类推,其余词句的意义也应了知。「眼」这个法就是圣典中的「眼」。见的意义就是「义」,即见的自性,是由其照了的义。其余词句亦类推。以这些词句,也就是以这五个词句。(问)「讲了什么?」是问总体含义。「仅仅是对缘的认知」,即对于识等缘法、由名色等缘而生起的缘的自性之认知,仅此被讲述,因为无差别地阐明了缘自性的识别。由于阐明了正确观察诸行的生起,故也说「讲述了处于运作过程中的稚嫩观」。显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ paṭipāṭiyā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha cakkhuṃ udapādīti pāḷiyaṃ paduddhāro. Kathaṃ udapādīti ceti āha ‘‘dassanaṭṭhenā’’ti. ‘‘Samudayassa paccakkhato dassanabhāvenāti vutto vāyamattho. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi attho veditabbo. Cakkhudhammoti cakkhūti pāḷidhammo. Dassanaṭṭho atthoti dassanasabhāvo tena pakāsetabbo attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ettakehi padehīti imehi pañcahi padehi. ‘‘Kiṃ kathita’’nti piṇḍatthaṃ pucchati. Paccayasañjānanamattanti viññāṇādīnaṃ paccayadhammānaṃ nāmarūpādipaccayuppannassa paccayasabhāvasañjānanamattaṃ kathitaṃ avisesato paccayasabhāvasallakkhaṇassa jotitattā. Saṅkhārānaṃ sammadeva udayadassanassa jotitattā ‘‘vīthipaṭipannā taruṇavipassanā kathitā’’ti ca vuttaṃ.
61 由于自证、近于现前,故说“此”。圣道等因具有道的作用,故称为道。此即前行部分的观,因此他说“为了觉悟”。“觉悟”一词具有状态成就的意义,故说“为了觉悟四圣谛”。遍知、断除、修习的现观,唯是为了作证现观、为证得涅槃,因此说“或者正是为了觉悟涅槃”,此亦梵行的目的。因为说“涅槃是最高的乐”。觉悟,是以一种通达而通达于四圣谛,因此“觉悟”一词具有主体成就的意义。以表达主格的词句,即表达第一格含义的词句。涅槃本身被说,因为识等于此灭尽。无生起的灭,即由一切缘的灭尽而有不再生起之灭,是究竟的灭。显示巴利原文
61. Attanā adhigatattā āsannapaccakkhatāya ‘‘aya’’nti vuttaṃ, ariyamaggādīnaṃ magganaṭṭhena maggoti. Pubbabhāgavipassanā hesā. Tenāha ‘‘bodhāyā’’ti. Bodhapadassa bhāvasādhanataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘catusaccabujjhanatthāyā’’ti. Pariññāpahānabhāvanābhisamayā yāvadeva sacchikiriyābhisamayatthā nibbānādhigamatthattā brahmacariyavāsassāti vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbānabujjhanatthāya eva vā’’ti. ‘‘Nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukha’’nti (ma. ni. 2.215, 217; dha. pa. 204) hi vuttaṃ. Bujjhatīti cattāri ariyasaccāni ekapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, tena bodha-saddassa kattusādhanattamāha. Paccattapadehīti paṭhamāvibhattidīpakehi padehi. Nibbānameva kathitaṃ viññāṇādi nirujjhati etthāti katvā. Anibbattinirodhanti sabbaso paccayanirodhena anuppādanirodhaṃ accantanirodhaṃ.
62 以所有“眼”等开头的五个词句。仅是“灭、灭”等所说,仅仅是讲述了对灭的认知,因为是初始阶段,并非通过通达而现见,因为圣道尚未证得。对诸行的如实灭观察,这是应通过达到顶峰的观而欲求的,因此也说“讲述了导向出起的强力观”。显示巴利原文
62.Sabbeheva etehi padehīti ‘‘cakkhū’’tiādīhi pañcahi padehi. Nirodhasañjānanamattamevāti ‘‘nirodho nirodhoti kho’’tiādinā nirodhassa sañjānanamattameva kathitaṃ pubbārambhabhāvato, na tassa paṭivijjhanavasena paccakkhato dassanaṃ ariyamaggassa anadhigatattā. Saṅkhārānaṃ sammadeva nirodhadassanaṃ nāma sikhāppattāya vipassanāya vasena icchitabbanti ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminī balavavipassanā kathitā’’ti ca vuttaṃ.
63 知已:以前分之智了知后。之后的后时:即如前所说,于缘灭尽智之后的阶段。对于成为取之缘的诸法:即对于以所缘缘等方式而成为四种取之缘、可执取的那些法,也就是五取蕴。正在运转:即持续转起。“于后时”等,即是此义。为何如此说?是为了表明:一切大菩萨于最后有中,皆依此行道而精进于菩提,而此观正是大菩萨们同样修习的。因此他说“一切”等。其中,儿子出生之日的大出离以及精进努力,应理解为法的必然性(自然法则);其余之事,则是依照“应当如此作”的必然性。在此当中,由长时修习、已反复串习之大悲所策励的心,欲从生死之苦中救拔那些感叹“这世界确实陷入了困苦”的有情世间;于是以观察困苦的显现为入口,从老死开始,思察缘起之相,这也是法的必然性。同样,由于此法门具有自主性、不为任何人所坏、具备纯一无杂的乐住、且属于第四禅那,因此从事入出息念业处。“在五蕴上专注之后”。显示巴利原文
63.Viditvāti pubbabhāgiyena ñāṇena jānitvā. Tato aparabhāgeti vuttanayena paccayanirodhajānanato pacchābhāge. Upādānassa paccayabhūtesūti catubbidhassapi upādānassa ārammaṇapaccayādinā paccayabhūtesu, upādāniyesūti attho . Vahantoti pavattento. Idanti ‘‘aparena samayenā’’tiādi vacanaṃ. Kasmā vuttanti ‘‘yāya paṭipattiyā sabbepi mahābodhisattā carimabhave bodhāya paṭipajjanti, vipassanāya mahābodhisattena tatheva paṭipanna’’nti kathetukamyatāvasena pucchāvacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbeyeva hī’’tiādi. Tattha puttassa jātadivase mahābhinikkhamanaṃ, padhānānuyogo ca dhammatāvasena veditabbo, itaraṃ itikattabbatāvasena. Tatthāpi cirakālaparibhāvanāya laddhāsevanāya mahākaruṇāya sañcoditamānasattā ‘‘kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4, 10) saṃsāradukkhato mocetuṃ icchitassa sattalokassa kicchāpattidassanamukhena jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya paccayākārasammasanampi dhammatāva. Tathā attādhīnatāya, kenaci anupakhatattā, asecanakasukhavihāratāya, catutthajjhānikatāya ca ānāpānakammaṭṭhānānuyogo. Pañcasu khandhesu abhinivisitvāti viññāṇanāmarūpādipariyāyena gahitesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu vipassanābhinivesavasena abhinivisitvā paṭipattiṃ ārabhitvā. Anukkamanti anu anu gāmitabbato paṭipajjitabbato ‘‘anukkama’’nti laddhanāmaṃ anupubbapaṭipattiṃ. Katvāti paṭipajjitvā.
在“如是色”中,第二个 iti 是举例之意,因此,第一个 iti 是显示自性与范围。由于虚词有多义性,或者可通过转向等方式,来理解此处的意义。为了开显内中所含的确定语句,他便说:“这是色,这是色的量,于此之外更无色”等。其中,“被破坏的自性”这一句,从总体上显示了色的自性;“大种与所造色的分类”等,则从别相显示。由此二者,“这是色”这句话的义旨便得到了指示。其中,“相”是指各个色法各自独特、不共的自性。“味”是指它作为自身果报之缘的状态。“现起”是指它作为究竟存在的、如实为智所行之境的状态。“足处”是近因,由此显示它依缘而存在。而“无余地把握色”的意义,也通过“这是色的量,于此之外更无色”这两句得到了指示,因为它通过全面通达色而作出了确定。在“如是色的集”中,此处的 iti 如同“比丘们,就像这样,愚者有怖畏”等句中的 iti 一样,具有“如是”的含义,因此他说:iti 是“如是”的意思。显示巴利原文
Iti rūpanti ettha dutiyo iti-saddo nidassanattho, tena paṭhamo iti-saddo sarūpassa, parimāṇassa ca bodhako anekatthattā nipātānaṃ,āvuttiādivasena vāyamattho veditabbo. Antogadhāvadhāraṇañca vākyaṃ dassento ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, ito uddhaṃ rūpaṃ natthī’’tiādimāha . Tattha ‘‘ruppanasabhāva’’nti iminā sāmaññato rūpassa sabhāvo dassito, ‘‘bhūtupādāyabheda’’ntiādinā visesato, tadubhayenapi ‘‘idaṃ rūpa’’nti padassa attho niddiṭṭho. Tattha lakkhaṇaṃ nāma tassa tassa rūpavisesassa anaññasādhāraṇo sabhāvo. Raso tasseva attano phalaṃ pati paccayabhāvo. Paccupaṭṭhānaṃ tassa paramatthato vijjamānattā yāthāvato ñāṇassa gocarabhāvo. Padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ, tenassa paccayāyattavuttitā dassitā. ‘‘Anavasesarūpapariggaho’’ti iminā pana ‘‘ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, ito uddhaṃ’’ rūpaṃ natthīti padadvayassāpi attho niddiṭṭho rūpassa sabbaso pariyādānavasena niyāmanato. ‘‘Iti rūpassa samudayo’’ti ettha pana iti-saddo ‘‘iti kho bhikkhave sappaṭibhayo bālo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.124; a. ni. 3.1) viya pakāratthoti āha ‘‘itīti eva’’nti.
“无明集”:指无明的生起、存在的状态,这是它的意义。因为“灭”的“灭”中的“生起”,也可以表达存在的状态。因此,由于前生已成就的无明存在,在此生中便有了色集、色的生起,这就是它的意义。“渴爱集”等语句,也是同样的道理。在“食集”中,这里因为段食在转起的诸缘中力量强大,所以只选取了它。但是,在选取它时,由于转起之缘的共通性,时节和心等食也就实际被一同含摄在内了,因此应当这样理解:对于由四因所生的色,从缘的角度来观察生起,就已经被阐明了。以“生起之相”等,是从时间的角度说观察生起。其中,“生起之相”是指色被称为生起的那种有为之相。即使是在观察……即不仅仅是缘的集,确切地说,也是在观察从刹那上的生起。因为首先从分位上观察生起而安立,之后再从相续上观察,而后渐次地从刹那上观察。“无明灭故色灭”:即由于以最上道使无明不再生起的灭,未来色不再生起的灭便出现,因为缘不存在时,果便不存在。“渴爱灭故业灭”中也是同样的道理。“食灭故”:即由于转起之缘——段食的不存在。“色灭”:即彼食所生的色不存在。其余如前所说。“变异之相”:显示巴利原文
Avijjāsamudayāti avijjāya uppādā, atthibhāvāti attho. Nirodhanirodhī hi uppādo atthibhāvavācakopi hoti, tasmā purimabhavasiddhāya avijjāya sati imasmiṃ bhave rūpasamudayo, rūpassa uppādo hotīti attho. ‘‘Taṇhāsamudayā’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Āhārasamudayāti ettha pana pavattipaccayesu kabaḷīkārāhārassa balavatāya so eva gahito. Tasmiṃ pana gahite pavattipaccayatāsāmaññena utucittāni gahitāneva hontīti catusamuṭṭhānikarūpassa paccayato udayadassanaṃ vibhāvitamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Nibbattilakkhaṇa’’ntiādinā kālavasena udayadassanamāha. Tattha nibbattilakkhaṇanti rūpassa uppādasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇaṃ. Passantopīti na kevalaṃ paccayasamudayameva, atha kho khaṇato udayaṃ passantopi. Addhāvasena hi paṭhamaṃ udayaṃ passitvā ṭhito puna santativasena disvā anukkamena khaṇavasena passati. Avijjānirodhā rūpanirodhoti aggamaggena avijjāya anuppādanirodhato anāgatassa rūpassa anuppādanirodho hoti paccayābhāve abhāvato. Taṇhānirodhā kammanirodhoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Āhāranirodhāti pavattipaccayassa kabaḷīkārāhārassa abhāvena. Rūpanirodhoti taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpassa abhāvo hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. ‘‘Vipariṇāmalakkhaṇa’’nti bhaṅgakālavasena hetaṃ vayadassanaṃ, tasmā taṃ addhāvasena paṭhamaṃ passitvā puna santativasena disvā anukkamena khaṇavasena passati. Ayañca nayo pākatikavipassakavasena vutto, bodhisattānaṃ panetaṃ natthi. Esa nayo udayadassanepi.
对于“如是受”等,也应依照前面在色处所说的理趣来理解其意义。因此他说:“这是受,这是受的量”等。其中,对于“感受……的自性”等,这里应将“自性”一词逐个连接:“感受的自性……了知的自性”。“感受的自性”即领纳的自性。“想的自性”即通过“这是蓝色、黄色”等方式标举所缘的自性。“行的自性”即造作积聚的自性。“识的自性”即认知所缘的自性。以“乐等”的“等”字,包含了苦、悦、忧、舍受。以“色想等”的“等”字,包含了声想等。以“触等”的“等”字,包含了思、寻等。以“眼识等”的“等”字,包含了一切的世间识。如同在识中所说的理趣,在受等中也如此。“它们的”:是指那些被称为“集”的法。“在三蕴中”:指在受、想、行蕴中。因为经中说“所触者感受,所触者想,所触者思”,所以应当说“触集”。又因为说“由名色为缘而有识”,在识蕴中,应当说“名色集”。所谓“就是它们的”,意思是在三蕴中,以“触的”;在识蕴中,以“名色的”——“灭没”一词也应连接到触与名色本身上;而对于无明等,则如之前在色处所说的一样,这是他的意图。显示巴利原文
‘‘Iti vedanā’’tiādīsupi heṭṭhā rūpe vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ vedanā, ettakā vedanā’’tiādi. Tattha vedayita…pe… sabhāvanti ettha ‘‘vedayitasabhāvaṃ…pe… vijānanasabhāva’’nti paccekaṃ sabhāva- saddo yojetabbo. Vedayitasabhāvanti anubhavanasabhāvaṃ. Sañjānanasabhāvanti ‘‘nīlaṃ pīta’’ntiādinā ārammaṇassa sallakkhaṇasabhāvaṃ. Abhisaṅkharaṇasabhāvanti āyūhanasabhāvaṃ. Vijānanasabhāvanti ārammaṇassa upaladdhisabhāvaṃ. Sukhādīti ādi-saddena dukkhasomanassadomanassupekkhāvedanānaṃ saṅgaho rūpasaññādīti ādi-saddena saddasaññādīnaṃ, phassādīti ādi-saddena cetanā vitakkādīnaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnanti ādi-saddena sabbesaṃ lokiyaviññāṇānaṃ saṅgaho. Yathā ca viññāṇe, esa nayo vedanādīsupi. Tesanti ‘‘samudayo’’ti vuttadhammānaṃ. Tīsu khandhesūti vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhesu. ‘‘Phuṭṭho vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) vacanato ‘‘phassasamudayā’’ti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Nāmarūpapaccayāpi viññāṇa’’nti (vibha. 246; dī. ni. 2.97) vacanato viññāṇakkhandhe ‘‘nāmarūpasamudayā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tesaṃ yevāti tīsu khandhesu ‘‘phassassa viññāṇakkhandhe nāmarūpassā’’ti phassanāmarūpānaṃyeva vasena atthaṅgamapadampi yojetabbaṃ, avijjādayo pana rūpe vuttasadisā evāti adhippāyo.
以五十种相的方式:依缘而有二十种,依刹那而有五种,如此二十五种为生起之相;依缘有二十种,依刹那有五种,如此二十五种为灭尽之相,合为五十种生灭之相。其中,五蕴的生起由此得以标记,故这些被称为相,即‘无明等集’;同样,五蕴灭尽、不再生起也由此得以标记,故也称为相,即无明等的究竟灭。至于‘生相’与‘变易相’,正是所谓的有为之相。如此,这五十种相应从自性来了知。‘随顺次第增长了时’:即如前所述的生灭智变得锐利、勇猛、明净而运转之后,当以当说的坏灭智等次第而智慧增长,达到最殊胜的观智时。首先,伴有三十六万亿百千种门、与一切知智相应、名为大金刚智的思择智,其威力已经积聚,如胎儿般摄受滋养而成熟,这是经无数时间积累的慧波罗蜜威力达到最胜究竟的道清净智;它渐次趋向出起,当与圣道相应时,圣道心便依道的次第从一切烦恼中解脱。正在解脱时,它这样解脱:即断除了一切所知障。对于烦恼,这称为‘断除习气’的断。显示巴利原文
Samapaññāsalakkhaṇavasenāti paccayato vīsati khaṇato pañcāti pañcavīsatiyā udayalakkhaṇānaṃ, paccayato vīsati khaṇato pañcāti pañcavīsatiyā eva vayalakkhaṇānaṃ cāti samapaññāsāya udayavayalakkhaṇānaṃ vasena. Tattha pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayo lakkhīyati etehīti lakkhaṇānīti vuccanti avijjādisamudayoti, tathā tesaṃ anuppādanirodho lakkhīyati etehīti lakkhaṇānīti vuccanti avijjādīnaṃ accantanirodho. Nibbattivipariṇāmalakkhaṇāni pana saṅkhatalakkhaṇamevāti. Evaṃ etāni samapaññāsalakkhaṇāni sarūpato veditabbāni. Yathānukkamena vaḍḍhiteti yathāvuttaudayabbayañāṇe tikkhe sūre pasanne hutvā vahante tato paraṃ vattabbānaṃ bhaṅgañāṇādīnaṃ uppattipaṭipāṭiyā buddhippatte paramukkaṃsagate vipassanāñāṇe. Pageva hi chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena pavattena sabbaññutaññāṇānucchavikena mahāvajirañāṇasaṅkhātena sammasanañāṇena sambhatānubhāvaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhantaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ paṭipadāvisuddhiñāṇaṃ aparimitakāle sambhatāya paññāpāramiyā ānubhāvena ukkaṃsapāramippattaṃ anukkamena vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvaṃ upagantvā yadā ariyamaggena ghaṭeti, tadā ariyamaggacittaṃ sabbakilesehi maggapaṭipāṭiyā vimuccati , vimuccantañca tathā vimuccati, yathā sabbañeyyāvaraṇappahānaṃ hoti. Yaṃ kilesānaṃ ‘‘savāsanappahāna’’nti vuccati, tayidaṃ pahānaṃ atthato anuppattinirodhoti āha ‘‘anuppādanirodhenā’’ti. Āsavasaṅkhātehi kilesehīti bhavato ābhavaggaṃ, dhammato āgotrabhuṃ savanato pavattanato āsavasaññitehi rāgo, diṭṭhi, mohoti imehi kilesehi. Lakkhaṇavacanañcetaṃ, pāḷiyaṃ yadidaṃ ‘‘āsavehī’’ti, tadekaṭṭhatāya pana sabbehipi kilesehi sabbehipi pāpadhammehi cittaṃ vimuccati. Aggahetvāti tesaṃ kilesānaṃ lesamattampi aggahetvā.
在道刹那,称为‘解脱’,即从各道所应断的烦恼中解脱;在果刹那,称为‘已解脱’。或者在道刹那,既是‘已解脱’又是‘在解脱’:于上道刹那时,对于下道所应断的烦恼已得解脱,同时又正在解脱自己所应断的烦恼。而在果刹那,唯是‘已解脱’——在一切果刹那中,都只是已解脱的状态,并不称为‘在解脱’。显示巴利原文
Maggakkhaṇe vimuccati nāma taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi phalakkhaṇe vimuttaṃ nāma. Maggakkhaṇe vā vimuttañcevavimuccati cāti uparimaggakkhaṇe heṭṭhimamaggavajjhehi vimuttañceva yathāsakaṃ pahātabbehi vimuccati ca. Phalakkhaṇe vimuttamevāti sabbasmimpi phalakkhaṇe vimuttameva, na vimuccati nāma.
“一切缚”是指包含下分结与上分结在内的所有种类的有结,即以殊胜的方式从一切有结中解脱。“善开启心相续”:由于智慧光芒的殊胜接触,心相续得以极善无余地全然绽放。‘四圣道智’等,正是善开启心相续的诸智,此处只是略示其中一部分。全面的显示将在后文呈现,届时再作解说。在“圆满的诸佛功德”中,指过去世无碍智等一切佛功德。因为当世间怙主证得最上道时,那时一切功德即被视为已掌握于手中,之后便称为‘已掌握而安住’。显示巴利原文
Sabbabandhanāti orambhāgiyuddhambhāgiyasaṅgahitā sabbasmāpi bhavasaññojanā, vippamutto visesato pakārehi mutto. Suvikasitacittasantānoti sātisayaṃ ñāṇarasmisamphassena suṭṭhu sammadeva samphullacittasantāno. ‘‘Cattāri maggañāṇānī’’tiādi yehi ñāṇehi suvikasitacittasantāno, tesaṃ ekadesena dassanaṃ. Nippadesato dassanaṃ pana parato āgamissati, tasmā tattheva tāni vibhajissāma. Sakale ca buddhaguṇeti atītaṃse appaṭihatañāṇādike sabbepi buddhaguṇe. Yadā hi lokanātho aggamaggaṃ adhigacchati, tadā sabbe guṇe hatthagate karoti nāma. Tato paraṃ ‘‘hatthagate katvā ṭhito’’ti vuccati.
在说了“圆满意图”之后,为了说明圆满意图性而引出优陀那,即诵出“经历多生轮回”等偈颂。其中,前两首偈颂的义理,已在前文《梵网经》的因缘注释中解说过。再者,“被铁锤所击者”中,“铁锤”是指铁匠所用的铁槌或铁锤,被其所击打者即称为“被铁锤所击”。这里的‘eva’字仅为小品词。“燃烧的火焰”是指在燃烧的火;或者这是依不敬语法而成的属格形式。“渐次平息者”是指按次第平息、被镇伏、被灭尽的。如同不知其去处,即是说它的去向不可知。这就是说:就像被铁槌、铁锤等击打过的铁块,或放在铜器等中燃烧的火,渐次平息之后,无论十方何处都不见其去处,因为由于缘灭而无结生,所以灭尽了。同样地,对于“善解脱者”,他们是通过正确的方法,以圣道,以彼分镇伏解脱为先导的永断解脱,从四取和诸漏中解脱出来的,所以是善解脱。因此,他们超越了称为欲缚的欲流、有流等一切剩余的暴流,而得安住,故是渡越欲缚暴流者;一切烦恼的躁动已全面止息,不被烦恼造作风所动摇,证得并达到了称为涅槃的行寂灭、不动安乐。那些漏尽者的趣向,在天、人等诸趣中,已不复存在。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paripuṇṇasaṅkappo’’ti vatvā paripuṇṇasaṅkappatāparidīpanaṃ udānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ādito dvinnaṃ gāthānamattho heṭṭhā brahmajālanidānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vutto eva. Parato pana ayoghanahatassāti ayo haññati etenāti ayoghanaṃ, kammārānaṃ ayokūṭaṃ, ayomuṭṭhi ca, tena ayoghanena hatassa pahatassa. Eva-saddo cettha nipātamattaṃ. Jalato jātavedasoti jalayamānassa aggissa, anādare vā etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Anupubbūpasantassāti anukkamena upasantassa vikkhambhantassa niruddhassa. Yathā na ñāyate gatīti yathā tassa gati na ñāyati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ayomuṭṭhikūṭādinā pahatattā ayoghanena hatassa pahatassa ayogatassa, kaṃsabhājanādigatassa vā jalamānassa aggissa anukkamena upasantassa dasasu disāsu na katthaci gati paññāyati paccayanirodhena appaṭisandhikaniruddhattāti. Evaṃ sammāvimuttānanti sammā hetunā ñāyena tadaṅgavikkhambhanavimuttipubbaṅgamāya samucchedavimuttiyā ariyamaggena catūhipi upādānehi, āsavehi ca muttattā sammā vimuttānaṃ, tato eva kāmabandhanasaṅkhātaṃ kāmoghabhavoghādibhedaṃ avasiṭṭhaoghañca taritvā ṭhitattā kāmabandhoghatārīnaṃ suṭṭhu paṭipassambhitasabbakilesavipphanditattā kilesābhisaṅkhāravātehi akampanīyatāya acalaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhārūpasamaṃ sukhaṃ pattānaṃ adhigatānaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ gati devamanussādibhedāsu gatīsu ‘‘ayaṃ nāmā’’ti paññāpetabbatāya abhāvato paññāpetuṃ natthi na upalabbhati, yathāvuttajātavedo viya apaññattikabhāvameva te gacchantīti attho. Evaṃ manasi karontoti ‘‘evaṃ anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādinā (dha. pa. 153) attano katakiccattaṃ manasi karonto bodhipallaṅke nisinnova virocitthāti yojanā.
梵天劝请的故事注释显示巴利原文
Brahmayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
64 「那么我」:这是一个表示‘遍寻’义的小品词。世尊以此指称自己,故说‘如果我又……’。「在第八七日」等,是为了显示:如同我们的世尊在成正觉后,以感受解脱之乐等因缘,在七个七日中如此行道,此后又以观察法义甚深等因缘而行道,同样地,一切正自觉者在成正觉时也都是如此行道,而这些七日等时段也是同样确定的,这乃是一切诸佛的常法。因此,为了显示毗婆尸世尊在成正觉时如此行道,而开始叙述。其中,‘在第八七日’是指第七七日之后所行的实践,并非像跏趺坐七日那样,另有一个称为第八七日的固定七日。“紧接着发生的是”:指‘我已证得此法’那样的思惟。显示巴利原文
64.Yannūnāti parivitakkanatthe nipāto, ahanti bhagavā attānaṃ niddisatīti āha ‘‘yadi panāha’’nti. ‘‘Aṭṭhame sattāhe’’tiādi yathā amhākaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho hutvā vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedanādivasena sattasu sattāhesu paṭipajji, tato parañca dhammagambhīratāpaccavekkhaṇādivasena, evameva sabbepi sammāsambuddhā abhisambuddhakāle paṭipajjiṃsu, te ca sattāhādayo tatheva vavatthapīyantīti ayaṃ sabbesampi buddhānaṃ dhammatā. Tasmā vipassī bhagavā abhisambuddhakāle tathā paṭipajjīti dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘aṭṭhame sattāhe’’ti idaṃ sattamasattāhato paraṃ, sattāhato orime ca pavattāya paṭipattiyā vasena vuttaṃ, na pallaṅkasattāhassa viya aṭṭhamassa nāma sattāhassa vavatthitassa labbhamānattā. Anantaroti ‘‘adhigato kho myāyaṃ dhammo’’tiādiko vitakko (dī. ni. 2.67; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 7, 8).
「证悟」(paṭividdha):指以自生智,通过‘这是苦’等面向而证悟的方式进行的,意思是如实觉悟。「法」(dhamma):指四圣谛法,因为除此之外没有需要被证悟的法。「甚深」(gambhīra):就像大海一样,除了那些累积成熟智慧资粮的人之外,其他人的智慧无法获得立足处,所以说‘这是遮遣浅显状态之语’。因为无法获得立足处,即由于无法深入,所以不能以自相和共相看到,所以说‘因为甚深,所以难见’。「难见」(dukkhena daṭṭhabba):是极难为某人所见,偶尔才能见到。若连见都不可得,则深入而随顺了解的说法根本不存在,所以说‘因为难见,故为难了悟’。「难了悟」(duranubodha):是极难了悟的,因为了悟是难做的。在此处应引用经文:‘比丘们!你们认为如何?何者是更难做、更难达成的呢?’(《相应部》5.1115)。又因具有寂静所缘而称‘寂静’(santa)。因熄灭了一切热恼而称‘熄灭’(nibbuta)。因被导至殊胜状态而称‘殊胜’(paṇīta)。以令人不满足之义称‘令不厌足’(atappaka),犹如美味食物。这其中,灭谛是寂静、具有寂静所缘的;道谛是寂静的、具有寂静所缘的,因为不寂静自性的烦恼及诸行的不存在,故是寂静的;因灭尽一切热恼而称熄灭;由于寂静与殊胜的状态本身,以及为了它而带来的无厌性,应视为‘令不厌足’。因此说‘这二者是针对出世间而说’。因为它是至上智的境界,所以不可仅靠思辨推论,以此而为微细智的境界,以及因微细的特性而称为‘微细’(nipuṇa)。由于不是愚者的境界,唯智者能知,故称‘唯智者能知’(paṇḍitavedanīya)。「所著」(ālaya):指因为应乐于其中而经常亲近的意思,就是五种欲功德(五欲)。「著者」(ālayanti):因乐于其中而亲近者,即渴爱所行处。「著乐者」(ālayaratā):乐于所著中。「极善喜者」(suṭṭhu muditā):极欢喜、极悦意而不厌倦。「喜乐者」(ramatī):获得喜乐、嬉戏、欢乐。这些有情对于五欲功德如是,对于贪也是如此,即欢喜它、欣求它,所以说‘两种’等。显示巴利原文
Paṭividdhoti sayambhuñāṇena ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā paṭimukhaṃ paṭivijjhanavasena pavatto, yathābhūtaṃ avabuddhoti attho. Dhammoti catusaccadhammo tabbinimuttassa paṭivijjhitabbadhammassa abhāvato. Gambhīroti mahāsamuddo viya makasatuṇḍasūciyā aññatra samupacitaparipakkañāṇasambhārehi aññesaṃ ñāṇena alabbhaneyyappatiṭṭho. Tenāha ‘‘uttānabhāvapaṭikkhepavacanameta’’nti. Alabbhaneyyappatiṭṭho ogāhituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya sarūpato visesato ca passituṃ na sakkāti āha ‘‘gambhīrattāva duddaso’’ti. Dukkhena daṭṭhabboti kicchena kenaci kadācideva daṭṭhabbo. Yaṃ pana daṭṭhumeva na sakkā, tassa ogāhetvā anu anu bujjhane kathā eva natthīti āha ‘‘duddasattāva duranubodho’’ti. Dukkhena avabujjhitabbo avabodhassa dukkarabhāvato. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha bhikkhave dukkarataraṃ vā durabhisambhavataraṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1115) suttapadaṃ vattabbaṃ. Santārammaṇatāya vā santo. Nibbutasabbapariḷāhatāya nibbuto. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītoti vā paṇīto. Atittikaraṭṭhena atappako sādurasabhojanaṃ viya. Ettha ca nirodhasaccaṃ santaṃ ārammaṇanti santārammaṇaṃ, maggasaccaṃ santaṃ, santārammaṇañcāti santārammaṇaṃ anupasantasabhāvānaṃ kilesānaṃ, saṅkhārānañca abhāvato santo nibbutasabbapariḷāhattā nibbuto, santapaṇītabhāveneva tadatthāya asecanakatāya atappakatā daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vutta’’nti. Uttamañāṇassa visayattā na takkena avacaritabbo, tato eva nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya, saṇhasukhumasabhāvattā ca nipuṇo. Bālānaṃ avisayattā paṇḍitehi eva veditabboti paṇḍitavedanīyo. Ālīyanti abhiramitabbaṭṭhena sevīyantīti ālayā, pañca kāmaguṇā. Ālayanti abhiramaṇavasena sevantīti ālayā, taṇhāvicaritāni. Ālayaratāti ālayaniratā. Suṭṭhu muditā ativiya muditā anukkaṇṭhanato. Ramatīti ratiṃ vindati kīḷati laḷati. Ime sattā yathā kāmaguṇe, evaṃ rāgampi assādenti abhinandanti yevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘duvidhampī’’tiādi.
所谓“处”(ṭhāna),是就“处”这个词而说的。但究其义理,它即指缘起。果依此而住立,因它而得以存在,故称为“处”——即以无明等作为诸行的缘。这些诸行的缘,叫作“此缘”(idappaccayā),也就是无明等。“此缘”本身即是“此缘性”(idappaccayatā),犹如“天子即天”的说法。或者说,无明等这些此缘,相对于各自的果,具有作为缘、能予生起的作用,这即是此缘性。由此,显示了以究竟义上的缘为特相的缘起。果依这些缘而生起,故称“缘起”(paṭiccasamuppāda)。这两个词都阐明了诸法的缘义。因此说:“这是诸行之缘——无明等的异名。”此处仅是简略说明,欲知详释,应如《清净道论》注释(《清淨道论》2.570)中所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāti ṭhāna-saddaṃ sandhāya. Atthato pana ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti ca paṭiccasamuppādo eva adhippeto. Tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayabhūtā avijjādayo. Imesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayāti idappaccayā, avijjādayova. Idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā yathā devo eva devatā , idappaccayānaṃ vā avijjādīnaṃ attano phalaṃ paṭicca paccayabhāvo uppādanasamatthatā idappaccayatā, tena paramatthapaccayalakkhaṇo paṭiccasamuppādo dassito hoti. Paṭicca samuppajjati phalaṃ etasmāti paṭiccasamuppādo. Padadvayenāpi dhammānaṃ paccayaṭṭho eva vibhāvito. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhārādipaccayānaṃ avijjādīnametaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāsu (visuddhi. 2.570) vuttanayena veditabbo.
“一切行寂止”等:“一切”是指“一切行寂止”等词所涵盖的一切,就究竟义而言即是涅槃。现在为了显示它的涅槃性,而说“因为……”等。“彼”,指涅槃。“依止”:即依此缘而生起——以圣道为所缘缘。“寂止”:以不再结生之彻底的寂灭而寂止。如此寂止之后,更殊胜地成为极寂静,故说“安息”,意欲表明:一切行在此处止息,故而称为“一切行寂止”,这即是涅槃。因为,在一切行离散的涅槃中,对一切行安息的这种描述才合乎道理。其余的语句也应这样理解。“所依”:苦所依止之处,即蕴等。“舍离”:以彻底断除的方式被舍弃。“一切爱”:指分为一百零八类的所有渴爱。“一切烦恼染”:指欲染、色染等一切烦恼性质的染,或者此处所说的“烦恼染”应理解为一切烦恼,而不仅仅是贪的差别,因为它们能令心颠倒。正如所说:“染心颠倒,瞋心颠倒,痴心颠倒”(《波逸提》271)。“离染”:舍弃其自性。“一切苦”:指老死等一切轮回之苦。“以有而再有”:以此有而有彼有。“以有爱乐的状态而被结缚”,或者说,业与果对于有爱者,才会有未来后有的存在。从此中出离,故称“出离”。显示巴利原文
Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbanti sabbasaṅkhārasamathādipadābhidheyyaṃ sabbaṃ, atthato nibbānameva. Idāni tassa nibbānabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tanti nibbānaṃ. Āgammāti paṭicca ariyamaggassa ārammaṇapaccayahetu. Sammantīti appaṭisandhikūpasamavasena sammanti. Tathā santā ca savisesaṃ upasantā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘vūpasammantī’’ti, etena sabbe saṅkhārā sammanti etthāti sabbasaṅkhārasamatho, nibbānanti dasseti. Sabbasaṅkhāravisaṃyutte hi nibbāne sabbasaṅkhāravūpasamapariyāyo ñāyāgato yevāti. Sesepadesupi eseva nayo. Upadhīyati ettha dukkhanti upadhi, khandhādayo. Paṭinissaṭṭhāti samucchedavasena pariccattā honti. Sabbā taṇhāti aṭṭhasatappabhedā sabbāpi taṇhā. Sabbe kilesarāgāti kāmarāgarūparāgādibhedā sabbepi kilesabhūtā rāgā, sabbepi vā kilesā idha kilesarāgāti veditabbā, na lobhavisesā eva cittassa viparītabhāvāpādanato. Yathāha ‘‘rattampi cittaṃ vipariṇataṃ, duṭṭhampi cittaṃ vipariṇataṃ, mūḷhampi cittaṃ vipariṇata’’nti (pārā. 271) virajjantīti attano sabhāvaṃ vijahanti. Sabbaṃ dukkhanti jarāmaraṇādibhedaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ. Bhavena bhavanti tena tena bhavena bhavantaraṃ. Bhavanikantibhāvena saṃsibbati, phalena vā saddhiṃ kammaṃ sataṇhasseva āyatiṃ punabbhavabhāvato. Tato vānato nikkhantaṃ tattha tassa sabbaso abhāvato. Ciranisajjācirabhāsanehi piṭṭhiāgilāyanatālugalasosādivasena kāyakilamatho ceva kāyavihesāca veditabbā. Sā ca kho desanāya atthaṃ ajānantānaṃ, appaṭipajjantānañca vasena, jānantānaṃ, pana paṭipajjantānañca desanāya kāyaparissamopi satthu aparissamova. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vihesesī’’ti (udā. 10). Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāma, so mama kilamatho assā’’ti. Ubhayanti cittakilamatho, cittavihesā cāti ubhayaṃ petaṃ buddhānaṃ natthi, bodhimūleyeva samucchinnattā.
65 “随念增长”:即整合、综合之义。“so”是“apissu”中的一个不变化词。“对毗婆尸”(Vipassiṃ):因与接头词“paṭi”的语法关系,在表示所属意义时用了对格,故解释为“毗婆尸的”。究竟是增长所得、堪称稀有,还是并非稀有?此处接头词“a”亦可表示增长义,如“无学诸法”(asekkhā dhammā)中的用法。应知,为与含括天神的世间分享佛法,历经四不可数及十万劫圆满诸波罗蜜,如今已证得法王之位的世尊,示现“不活跃”之相,其偈颂义理稀有难得,世尊之增长所得亦复如是。而从义理上审视,这些偈颂则是“非稀有”的。“成为所行境”:即现前。现前即成为应作意之对象,故说“成为应遍寻”。显示巴利原文
65.Anubrūhanaṃ sampiṇḍanaṃ. Soti ‘‘apissū’’ti nipāto. Vipassinti paṭi-saddayogena sāmiatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘vipassissā’’ti. Vuddhippattā acchariyā vā anacchariyā. Vuddhiatthopi hi akāro hoti yathā‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. tikamātikāya 11). Kappānaṃ cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni satasahassañca sadevakassa lokassa dhammasaṃvibhāgakaraṇatthameva pāramiyo pūretvā idāni samadhigatadhammarājassa tattha appossukkatāpattidīpanatā, gāthātthassa acchariyatā, tassa vuddhippatti cāti veditabbā. Atthadvārena hi gāthānaṃ anacchariyatā. Gocarā ahesunti upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Upaṭṭhānañca vitakketabbatāvāti āha ‘‘parivitakkayitabbataṃ pāpuṇiṃsū’’ti.
“如果说这是乐行道,为何又说是难行道?”为解答此问,而有“于圆满波罗蜜时”等语。此类言语,是对那些能布施难舍之物的人所说。助词“ha”在此表示“明白”等义;也有人认为它表示“决定”的意思。整句连释为:以如此艰难证得的法来教导,这显然是毫无意义的,或者说是决定无用的。“alaṃ”与“hala”同义,正如“我说‘hala’”等句所示。[被贪与嗔所触者]:如同被毒蛇咬伤的人,被贪和嗔的毒所染污、所征服。[随贪与嗔者]:指被贪和嗔所追随的人。显示巴利原文
Yadi sukhāpaṭipadāva kathaṃ kicchatāti āha ‘‘pāramīpūraṇakāle’’tiādi. Evamādīni duppariccajāni dentassa. Ha-iti vā byattanti etasmiṃ atthe nipāto, ‘‘ekaṃsatthe’’ti keci. Ha byattaṃ, ekaṃsena vā alaṃ nippayojanaṃ evaṃ kicchena adhigatassa dhammassa desetunti yojanā. Halanti ‘‘ala’’nti iminā samānatthaṃ padaṃ ‘‘halanti vadāmī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.172) viya. Rāgadosaphuṭṭhehīti phuṭṭhavisena viya sappena rāgena, dosena ca samphuṭṭhehi abhibhūtehi. Rāgadosānugatehīti rāgadosehi anubandhehi.
「常等」:即执取常等观念。「如此而去」:指如此转起,以无常等形态而转起。其中“四圣谛法”一词,在无常等以及诸谛中,应随所得之理解来把握。又一种解释,“如此而去”:即我及其他正自觉者,由如是执取“无常”等观念而去——已了知、已通达,这就是它的意思。那些被欲贪、有贪所染污的人,由于心被诸盖遮蔽;那些被见贪所染污的人,由于颠倒的执取,他们将不能如实见到此法,不能通达证悟。「令其如此执取」:即让他们随“无常”等自性,如实了知此法。他们被贪与嗔所压伏,完全处于昏昧状态,故称「为黑暗蕴所覆」。显示巴利原文
Niccādīnanti niccaggāhādīnaṃ. Evaṃ gatanti evaṃ pavattaṃ aniccādiākārena pavattaṃ. ‘‘Catusaccadhamma’’nti idaṃ aniccādīsu, saccesu ca yathālābhavasena gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ gatanti vā evaṃ ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā abhinivisitvā mayā, aññehi ca sammāsambuddhehi gataṃ, ñātaṃ paṭividdhanti attho. Kāmarāgena, bhavarāgena ca rattā nīvaraṇehi nivutacittatāya, diṭṭhirāgena rattā viparītābhinivesena na dakkhanti yāthāvato imaṃ dhammaṃ nappaṭivijjhissanti. Evaṃ gāhāpetunti ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā sabhāvena yāthāvato dhamme jānāpetuṃ. Rāgadosaparetatāpi nesaṃ sammūḷhabhāvenevāti āha ‘‘tamokhandhena āvuṭā’’ti.
为阐明于说法生起不欲的原因,世尊自己以“为何又……”等语提出质问。这其中,现今对说法生起不欲,实是一切诸佛的常行法性;或者,一切菩萨从最初发大誓愿时,即以“于我,以不知者之形态……”等策励自心,这也是一种常行法性,因此说“于我……”等。在此,“以不知者之形态”,即不是成为令含天众之世间震动的佛陀,而只是以成为佛弟子这种为人所知的身份。导致说法不欲的原因有三种:对立面的强大有力;此法的极其甚深;以及世尊对此法怀有极深重的尊重。为显示这些,便开始了“因此,对于他……”等语。这里所说的“对立面”,就是指贪等烦恼,它们是正确行道的障碍。由于它们力量强大,经长久熏习而深植于有情的相续中,极难清除;它们压倒了那些有情,如同醉象压倒无力之人,令其陷入不幸与毁灭;它们安住于长达数百由旬、堆积紧密、构造坚厚且布满荆棘的险恶之处。然而,为了显示其难以清除——在于难以破除、难以切断,所以才说“于是对于他……”等话。在此,由于内部尚未成熟,如同盛满酸粥的葫芦;由于久置,如同装满酪……显示巴利原文
Dhammadesanāya appossukkatāpattiyā kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādinā sayameva codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tattha yathāyaṃ idāni dhammadesanāya appossukkatāpatti sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇadhammatāvasena, sabbabodhisattānaṃ ādito ‘‘kiṃ me aññātavesenā’’tiādinā (bu. vaṃ. 2.99) mahābhinīhāre attano cittassa samussāhanaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇadhammatā vāti āha ‘‘kiṃ me’’tiādi. Tattha aññātavesenāti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ unnādento buddho ahutvā kevalaṃ buddhānaṃ sāvakabhāvūpagamanavasena aññātarūpena. Tividhaṃ kāraṇaṃ appossukkatāpattiyā paṭipakkhassa balavabhāvo, dhammassa paramagambhīratā, tattha ca bhagavato sātisayaṃ gāravanti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha paṭipakkhā nāma rāgādayo kilesā sammāpaṭipattiyā antarāyakarattā. Tesaṃ balavabhāvato ciraparibhāvanāya sattasantānato dubbisodhiyatāya te satte mattahatthino viya dubbalaṃ purisaṃ ajjhottharitvā anayabyasanaṃ āpādentā anekasatayojanāyāmavitthāraṃ sunicitaṃ ghanasannivesaṃ kaṇṭakaduggampi adhisenti. Dūrappabheda ducchejjatāhi dubbisodhiyataṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘athassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ca anto āmaṭṭhatāya kañjikapuṇṇalābu ciraparivāsikatāya takkabharitacāṭi snehatintadubbalabhāvena vasātelapītapilotikā; telamissitatāya añjanamakkhitahatthā dubbisodhanīyā vuttā. Hīnūpamā cetā rūpappabandhabhāvato, acirakālikattā ca malīnatāya, kilesasaṃkileso eva pana dubbisodhanīyataro anādikālikattā, anusayitattā ca. Tenāha ‘‘atisaṃkiliṭṭhā’’ti. Yathā ca dubbisodhanīyatāya evaṃ gambhīraduddasaduranubodhānampi vuttaupamā hīnūpamāva.
法,虽甚深,若能摧破对治,便会变得极为明显。然而,摧破对治取决于正确的行道;正确的行道又取决于听闻正法;听闻正法则取决于对大师与法的净信。这种净信,尤其在世间,是以对可恭敬、应受尊重的对象生起渴望为因的。依此脉络,众生对法的行道,是以梵天劝请等为因缘。为了显示此义,故说“又复……”等。显示巴利原文
Gambhīropi dhammo paṭipakkhavidhamanena supākaṭo bhaveyya, paṭipakkhavidhamanaṃ pana sammāpaṭipattipaṭibaddhaṃ, sā saddhammasavanādhīnā, taṃ satthari, dhamme ca pasādāyattaṃ. So visesato loke sambhāvanīyassa garukātabbassa abhipatthanāhetukoti panāḷikāya sattānaṃ dhammasampaṭipattiyā brahmayācanādinimittanti taṃ dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha.
66 “某位”:虽像是不太为人所知的人物,但为显示他实为众所周知,故说“此轮围世界中的上首大梵天”,即大梵天界中的上首大梵天。如同欲界天中的帝释天,他在梵天界中也是众所周知、赫赫有名的。“少有尘垢者”:为显此义——“他们有”少量作为随烦恼的贪等尘垢,故称“少有尘垢”;此类众生的眼即智慧眼,少有尘垢,故说“慧眼”等。应如此理解:那些贪等尘垢少的众生,即是“少有尘垢之种类者”。关于“因不听闻”:是将“不听闻”当作“因”,却用了主格,如同“自己证知”等用法,故说“由于不听闻”。所谓“以十福业事为缘”:即以布施等十种能令解脱成熟的福业事为缘。故说“已作诸福德事者……”等。不过在《破除戏论》中则说“以十二福业事为缘”,即在布施等十种之外,加上了皈依、利他、回向二种而说。显示巴利原文
66. ‘‘Aññataro’’ti appaññāto viya kiñcāpi vuttaṃ, atha kho pākaṭo paññātoti dassetuṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe jeṭṭhakamahābrahmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahābrahmabhavane jeṭṭhakamahābrahmā. So hi sakko viya kāmadevaloke, brahmaloke ca pākaṭo paññāto. Upakkilesabhūtaṃ appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ etassāti apparajaṃ, apparajaṃ akkhi paññācakkhu yesaṃ te taṃsabhāvāti katvā apparajakkhajātikāti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paññāmaye’’tiādimāha. Appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ yesaṃ te taṃsabhāvā apparajakkhajātikāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Assavanatāti ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.28, 405; ma. ni. 1.154, 444) viya karaṇe paccattavacananti āha ‘‘assavanatāyā’’ti. Dasapuññakiriyavatthuvasenāti dānādidasavidhavimuttiparipācanīyapuññakiriyavatthūnaṃ vasena. Tenāha ‘‘katādhikārā’’tiādi. Papañcasūdaniyaṃ pana ‘‘dvādasapuññakiriyavasenā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.282) vuttaṃ, taṃ dānādīsu saraṇagamanaparahitapariṇāmanadvaya pakkhipanavasena vuttaṃ.
69 以尊重之心,向应受尊敬者提出尊重的请求,名为“劝请”;从义理上说,这也是一种请求,故说“请求”。若智见只限于一特定范围,且为诸佛所独有的此二智,便称为“佛眼”,因此说:“因为此二智,名为佛眼”。对于较低的三道智,称为“法眼”,因为它们见四圣谛法,仅属于单纯的“见”。这些智慧被说为如同闪电,而最高的道智已达成智慧作用的圆满,不再是单纯的“见”,故不称为“法眼”。正因如此,它被说为如同金刚。“如所说之理”:即如“少有尘垢之种类”一句所说的道理。烦恼微薄者称为“少有尘垢”,故烦恼深厚者应知为“多有尘垢”。因能摧破对立面,诸根为利、锐利、明净;反之,则为钝。“信等种类”:指以信等为征象。“善好”:即美好者。《破痴》中说:“那些心性的部分是美好的,他们就有善好的征象”,这与此处释义完全相符,应如此看待。因此,由于信成就等,心性属善好;反之,则属不善好。所谓“因”,即指缘相。显示巴利原文
69. Garuṭṭhāniyesu gāravavasena garukarapatthanā ajjhesanā, sāpi atthato patthanā evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yācana’’nti. Padesavisayañāṇadassanaṃ hutvā buddhānaṃyeva āveṇikabhāvato idaṃ ñāṇadvayaṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhū’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ buddhacakkhūti nāma’’nti. Tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānanti heṭṭhimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānaṃ ‘‘dhammacakkhū’’ti nāmaṃ, catusaccadhammadassananti katvā dassanamattabhāvato. Yato tāni ñāṇāni vijjūpamābhāvena vuttāni, aggamaggañāṇaṃ pana ñāṇakiccassa sikhāppattiyā dassanamattaṃ na hotīti ‘‘dhammacakkhū’’ti na vuccatīti. Yato taṃ vajirūpamābhāvena vuttaṃ. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘apparajakkhajātikā’’ti ettha vuttanayeneva. Yasmā mandakilesā ‘‘apparajakkhā’’ti vuttā, tasmā bahalakilesā ‘‘mahārajakkhā’’ti veditabbā. Paṭipakkhavidhamanasamatthatāya tikkhāni sūrāni visadāni, vuttavipariyāyena mudūni. Saddhādayo ākārāti saddahanādippakāre vadati. Sundarāti kalyāṇā. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ pana ‘‘yesaṃ āsayādayo koṭṭhāsā sundarā, te svākārā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 814) vuttaṃ, taṃ imāya atthavaṇṇanāya aññadatthu saṃsandati sametīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yato saddhāsampadādivasena ajjhāsayassa sundaratāti, tabbipariyāyato asundaratāti. Kāraṇaṃ nāma paccayākāro, saccāni vā. Paralokanti samparāyaṃ. Taṃ dukkhāvahaṃ vajjaṃ viya bhayato passitabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘paralokañceva vajjañca bhayato passantī’’ti. Sampattibhavato vā aññattā vipattibhavo ‘‘paraloko’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘para…pe… passantī’’ti.
在此,“这是此处的经文”一语,是指在阐明“少尘垢”等词义时,以此经文证明此一情形。信等令解脱成熟之法之所以强而有力,正是由于其对立面——那些恶法的薄弱;反之,当那些恶法强而有力时,信等便薄弱。因此,依于令解脱成熟之法是否殊胜,《无碍解道》的经文中便分别显示了“少尘垢、多尘垢”等类别。如此,依信等而有五种少尘垢者,依不信等而有五种多尘垢者。这样便阐明了利根、钝根等五十种人。然而,依信等内部的差别,还应知道有多种的分类。蕴等即以其坏灭之义而为世间;成就的有之世间,即是善趣的再生有;成就由此生起,故成就所生之世间,便是能导向善趣的业有。恶趣的再生有及能导向恶趣的业有,则是失坏的有之世间与失坏所生之世间。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃpanettha pāḷīti ettha ‘‘apparajakkhā’’dipadānaṃ atthavibhāvane ayaṃ tassa tathābhāvasādhakapāḷi. Saddhādīnañhi vimuttiparipācakadhammānaṃ balavabhāvo tappaṭipakkhānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ dubbalabhāveneva hoti, tesañca balavabhāvo saddhādīnaṃ dubbalabhāvenāti vimuttiparipācakadhammānaṃ savisesaṃ atthitānatthitāvasena ‘‘apparajakkhā mahārajakkhā’’ti ādayo pāḷiyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.111) vibhajitvā dassitā. Iti saddhādīnaṃ vasena pañca apparajakkhā, asaddhiyādīnaṃ vasena pañca mahārajakkhā. Evaṃ tikkhindriyamudindriyādayoti vibhāvitā paññāsa puggalā. Saddhādīnaṃ pana antarabhedena anekabhedā veditabbā. Khandhādayo eva lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko, sampattibhavabhūto loko sampattibhavaloko, sugatisaṅkhāto upapattibhavo, sampatti sambhavati etenāti sampattisambhavaloko sugatisaṃvattaniyo kammabhavo. Duggatisaṅkhātaupapattibhavaduggatisaṃvattaniyakammabhavā vipattibhavalokavipattisambhavalokā.
其次,为进一步以单数、二种等方式分析世间而作说明,故说“一世间”等。因为食等是以坏灭之义而为世间。其中,“一世间:一切有情皆依食而住”——这句以补特伽罗为安立的教说,说明了诸行的依缘而转起性;由此,一切行世间是单一的、唯一的种类,因为没有其他的类别。在“二世间”等中,也应以这个道理来理解其义。此处不取涅槃,因为涅槃具有非世间的自性。难道不是“依食而住”中,由于依缘而转起性,道果也成了世间吗?不会,因为这里“世间”是指应遍知的苦谛诸法。或者,不被执取为“不坏、不灭”者,即不是那样,那个“世间”;对于那些不被这样执取的出世间法,便没有世间性。作为执取之所缘的蕴是取蕴。以随顺等为事相的利等八法是世间法。十处是指十种色处,因为是对好乐厌离者而说。对于他,一切三界之业都是应受谴责、应被舍弃的,所以说“一切行是过失,一切趣向有之业是过失”。那些信等薄弱的人,在此以“无信”等而说。但并非完全彻底没有信等,因此在少尘垢等五组二法中,每一组各作十种,而说“以五十种行相了知此五根”。或者,世尊由随顺与遮止而了知信等诸根的优劣。显示巴利原文
Puna ekakadukādivasena lokaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘eko loko’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āhārādayo hi lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti. Tattha ‘‘eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.303; a. ni. 10.27, 28; paṭi. ma. 1.2, 112, 208) yāyaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ paccayāyattavuttitā vuttā, tāya sabbo saṅkhāraloko eko ekavidho pakārantarassābhāvato. ‘‘Dve lokā’’tiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Nāmaggahaṇena cettha nibbānassa aggahaṇaṃ tassa alokasabhāvattā. Nanu ca ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti ettha paccayāyattavuttitāya maggaphalānampi lokatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati pariññeyyānaṃ dukkhasaccadhammānaṃ ‘‘idha loko’’ti adhippetattā. Atha vā na lujjati na palujjatīti yo gahito, tathā na hoti, so lokoti taṃgahaṇarahitānaṃ lokuttarānaṃ natthi lokatā. Upādānānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā upādānakkhandhā. Anurodhādivatthubhūtā lābhādayo aṭṭha lokadhammā. Dasāyatanānīti dasa rūpāyatanāni vivaṭṭajjhāsayassa adhippetattā. Tassa ca sabbaṃ tebhūmakakammaṃ garahitabbaṃ, vajjitabbañca hutvā upaṭṭhātīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbe abhisaṅkhārā vajjaṃ, sabbe bhavagāmikammā vajja’’nti. Yesaṃ puggalānaṃ saddhādayo mandā, te idha ‘‘assaddhā’’tiādinā vuttā. Na pana sabbena sabbaṃ saddhādīnaṃ abhāvatoti apparajakkhadukādīsu pañcasu dukesu ekekasmiṃ dasa dasa katvā ‘‘paññāsāya ākārehi imāni pañcindriyāni jānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā anvayato, byatirekato ca saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ paropariyattaṃ jānātīti katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Ettha ca apparajakkhādivasena āvajjantassa bhagavato te sattā puñjapuñjāva hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, na ekekā.
有莲花之处,故为莲花池,指湖泊或水域,但此处意指湖泊,故说「在莲花林中」。那些在水中处于沉没状态而开花、生长的莲花,是内沉而生长者。已被开示的,是指在注释书中被阐明的,或者即在此处以「还有其他」等而开示的。略说即知者:略说是指智的触发,仅在智被触发时即了知,这是其义。广说方知者:了知详细展开之义者。应被引导者:应通过略示等而被引导者。仅在举示之时:即法在略说中被举示的那一刻。法现观:以智对四圣谛法的现观。此被称为:此人能依「四念处」等略说论母正在开示的教法次第,驱策智而证得阿罗汉,被称为「略说即知者」。此被称为:在安立略说论母后,当义理被详细分别解说时,能证得阿罗汉者,被称为「广说方知者」。从略说故:以略说为因,即正在略说者,或令人略说者之义。从遍问故:遍问义理者。依次第而得法现观:渐次证得阿罗汉者。非于彼生而得法现观:以那个自体,不能生起道、果,乃至最低的禅那或观。此人被称为以句为最上者:此人唯以文句为最上,故被称为「句最上者」。显示巴利原文
Uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī, gacchopi jalāsayopi, idha pana jalāsayo adhippetoti āha ‘‘uppalavane’’ti. Yāni udakassa anto nimuggāneva hutvā pusanti vaḍḍhanti, tāni antonimuggaposīnī.Dīpitānīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsitāni, idheva vā ‘‘aññānipī’’tiādinā dīpitāni. Ugghaṭitaññūti ugghaṭanaṃ nāma ñāṇugghaṭanaṃ, ñāṇe ugghaṭitamatte eva jānātīti attho. Vipañcitaṃ vitthāramevamatthaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Uddesādīhi netabboti neyyo. Saha udāhaṭavelāyāti udāhāre dhammassa uddese udāhaṭamatte eva. Dhammābhisamayoti catusaccadhammassa ñāṇena saddhiṃ abhisamayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā nayena saṅkhittena mātikāya dīpiyamānāya desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhituṃ samattho ‘‘puggalo ugghaṭitaññū’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ saṅkhittena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ samattho ‘‘puggalo vipañcitaññū’’ti vuccati. Uddesatoti uddesahetu, uddisantassa, uddisāpentassa vāti attho. Paripucchatoti atthaṃ paripucchantassa. Anupubbenadhammābhisamayo hotīti anukkamena arahattappatto hoti. Na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hotīti tena attabhāvena maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā antamaso jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo padaparamoti ayaṃ puggalo byañjanapadameva paramaṃ assāti ‘‘padaparamo’’ti vuccati.
「那些」:指在《分别论》中针对「两类人」所说。所谓「业障」,即五种无间业。「异熟障」,指无因的结生。由于二因结生者亦不能证悟圣道,故二因结生也应知即是「异熟障」。「烦恼障」,即决定性的邪见。「无信」,指于佛陀等无有信心。「无欲」,谓于可行之善法而无意愿,北俱卢洲之人即如是安住于无欲的状态。「劣慧」,即有分慧有所欠缺。然而,即便有分慧本自圆满,若此人之有分不能成为出世间的缘,亦同样称为「劣慧者」。「于善法中不能进入正性决定」,是说在善法中,不能趣入、不能证得那名为正性决定的圣道。至于「不是业障……」等语句,则应依与上述相反的道理来理解。显示巴利原文
Yeti ye duvidhe puggale sandhāya vuttaṃ vibhaṅge kammāvaraṇenāti pañcavidhena ānantariyakammena. Vipākāvaraṇenāti ahetukapaṭisandhiyā. Yasmā duhetukānampi ariyamaggapaṭivedho natthi, tasmā duhetukapaṭisandhipi ‘‘vipākāvaraṇamevā’’ti veditabbā. Kilesāvaraṇenāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā. Assaddhāti buddhādīsu saddhā rahitā. Acchandikāti kattukamyatākusalacchandarahitā, uttarakurukā manussā acchandikaṭṭhānaṃ paviṭṭhā. Duppaññāti bhavaṅgapaññāya parihīnā, bhavaṅgapaññāya pana paripuṇṇāyapi yassa bhavaṅgaṃ lokuttarassa paccayo na hoti, sopi duppañño eva nāma. Abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesusammattanti kusalesu dhammesu sammattaniyāmasaṅkhātaṃ ariyamaggaṃ okkamituṃ adhigantuṃ abhabbā. ‘‘Na kammāvaraṇenā’’tiādīni vuttavipariyāyena veditabbāni.
关于「贪行者」等类别中应解说的内容,在《胜义灯》——即对《清净道论》的注释——中有详明阐述,此处从略。显示巴利原文
‘‘Rāgacaritā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paramatthadīpaniyaṃ [paramatthamañjūsāyaṃ visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyanti bhavitabbaṃ –
「如上所述,即是于各处随宜所说之诸究竟义。以其有珍藏义理之功用,故依其名而称为『究竟义藏』。」(此系《清净道论大复注》结语中之自述)显示巴利原文
‘‘Sā esā paramatthānaṃ, tattha tattha yathārahaṃ;
Nidhānato paramattha-mañjūsā nāma nāmato’’ti. (visuddhimaggamahāṭīkāya nigamane sayameva vuttattā)] visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ;
70 「关于」的意思是:为了向世尊表明自己内心的意旨而作的陈述。之所以说「如于岩石山顶上」,是因为岩石山既高耸且坚固,并非尘土堆成的山或土石混合之山。「法所成的宫殿」是指出世间法。它之所以像山,是因为它超越一切法而高高矗立;它又像宫殿。在这里,「法」一词是智慧的代名词。正如《法集论注》中所说:「智慧因具有高高矗立的特性,故称为『宫殿』。」同样的道理,经中也说:显示巴利原文
70.Ārabbhāti attano adhippetassa atthassa bhagavato jānāpanaṃ uddissāti attho. Selo pabbato ucco hoti thiro ca, na paṃsupabbato, missakapabbato vāti āha ‘‘sele yathā pabbatamuddhanī’’ti. Dhammamayaṃ pāsādanti lokuttaradhammamāha. So hi pabbatasadiso ca hoti sabbadhamme atikkamma abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādasadiso ca, paññāpariyāyo vā idha dhamma-saddo . Sā hi abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādoti abhidhamme (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 16) niddiṭṭhā. Tathā cāha –
登上智慧宫殿之人,无忧无虑,观照沉陷忧苦的众生;
如同站在山顶的智者,俯视地上的愚人。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paññāpāsādamāruyha, asoko sokiniṃ pajaṃ; Pabbataṭṭhova bhūmaṭṭhe, dhīro bāle avekkhatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 28);
在此,“正如……”等句,其意义的关联应这样理解:好比有人在暗夜中站在山上向下看,田间的田埂、小屋以及睡在其中的人,都因自身不发光而不可见;但小屋里的火焰,却因自身放光而清晰可见。同样地,当佛陀登上法之宫殿俯视众生世间,那些未造善业的有情,因其心中没有智慧之火点燃,无光、不殊胜,犹如黑夜中胡乱射出的箭,不能进入世尊智慧的视野。而那些已造善业、具备条件的有情,即使远在他方,也能进入世尊智慧的视野,因为他们炽燃的智慧之火正熊熊燃烧,散发光辉,且其生命相续极为殊胜,犹如雄伟的雪山一般醒目。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā hī’’tiādīsu yathā pabbate ṭhatvā rattandhakāre heṭṭhā olokentassa purisassa khette kedārapāḷikuṭiyo, tattha sayitamanussā ca na paññāyanti anujjalabhāvato. Kuṭikāsu pana aggijālā paññāyati ujjalabhāvato evaṃ dhammapāsādamāruyha sattalokaṃ olokayato bhagavato ñāṇassa āpāthaṃ nāgacchanti akatakalyāṇā sattā ñāṇagginā anujjalabhāvato, anuḷārabhāvato ca rattiṃ khittā sarā viya honti. Katakalyāṇā pana bhabbapuggalā dūre ṭhitāpi bhagavato ñāṇassa āpāthaṃ āgacchanti paripakkañāṇaggitāya samujjalabhāvato, uḷārasantānatāya himavantapabbato viya cāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
“起来吧”:你应当从那种名为不活跃的退缩过失、疲厌状态中振作起来。“以精进”:即以具备殊胜的四种正勤的精进力。因为精进是英雄的本性,或英雄的作为。由于烦恼魔与死魔在未来不再生起,故合称“死烦恼魔”。这里没有单独提到行魔的征服,因为征服了烦恼魔,就已经清楚地表明行魔也被征服。“能运载”:指有能力把众生从轮回的大沙漠运送到名为涅槃的安稳之地。显示巴利原文
Uṭṭhehīti tvaṃ dhammadesanāya appossukkatāsaṅkhātasaṅkocāpattito kilāsubhāvato uṭṭhaha. Vīriyavantatāyāti sātisaya catubbidhasammappadhānavīriyavantatāya. Vīrassa hi bhāvo, kammaṃ vā vīriyaṃ. Kilesamārassa viya maccumārassapi āyatiṃ asambhavato ‘‘maccukilesamārāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Abhisaṅkhāramāravijayassa aggahaṇaṃ kilesamāravijayeneva tabbijayassa jotitabhāvato. Vāhanasamatthatāyāti saṃsāramahākantārato nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ khemappadesaṃ sampāpanasamatthatāya.
71 “不死之门已为他们敞开”——有人如此读诵。世尊以大悲心为依,依自悟智而证得,故而将通往涅槃之门——即涅槃的入口——开启并安立。“让他们释放信心”:意为宣明信心,示现自己信受之相。因其能平稳、无难地运转,故称“善运转”。他如是思维:我对他们,未曾说过,也未曾不说。显示巴利原文
71. ‘‘Apārutaṃ tesaṃ amatassa dvāra’’nti keci paṭhanti. Nibbānassa dvāraṃ pavisanamaggo vivaritvā ṭhapito mahākaruṇūpanissayena sayambhuñāṇena adhigatattā. Saddhaṃ pamuñcantūti saddhaṃ pavedentu, attano saddahanākāraṃ upaṭṭhāpentūti attho. Sukhena akicchena pavattanīyatāya suppavattitaṃ. Na bhāsiṃ na bhāsissāmīti cintesi.
上首弟子双贤的解说显示巴利原文
Aggasāvakayugavaṇṇanā
73 “交谈之后”:即如“贤友,你的诸根极为明净”等语(《大品》60),作问候交谈之后。因为此番交谈,成为他日后前往亲近世尊的助缘。显示巴利原文
73.Sallapitvāti ‘‘vippasannāni kho te āvuso indriyānī’’tiādinā (mahāva. 60) ālāpasallāpaṃ katvā. Tañhissa aparabhāge satthu santikaṃ upasaṅkamanassa paccayo ahosi.
75-6 “次第论”,即应当依次第、顺序宣说的论。那是什么呢?即布施论等。其中,布施论首先宣说,因它在众人中普遍流传,为一切人所共有,容易行持,且为安立于戒中的方便。乐于施舍之人,对所执持之物无有贪著,故能轻易受持诸戒,于戒中善住。因为戒能令施者与受者俱得清净,既宣说了饶益他人,复宣说遮止损害他人;既宣说了应作之法,复宣说不应作之法;既宣说了财富成就之因,复宣说生命成就之因,故于布施论后,继说戒论。若此布施与戒仍系缚于轮回,则为显示‘这种种的生命成就正是他们之果报’,亦为显示‘依此布施与戒所成的、有殊胜、更殊胜等种种差别的福德事,能感得于四大王天等处,有殊胜、更殊胜等差别且不可衡量的天界受用与生命成就’,继之宣说生天论。宣说天界之后,为显示‘诸天尚有贪等烦恼所染,而圣道则永离染污’,故于生天论后,续说道论。宣说道时,为令证悟其道的方法得以明了,虽有些内容也通于天界之法,然更应宣说:一切欲乐皆有过患,是无常的。显示巴利原文
75-6.Anupubbiṃkathanti anupubbiyā anupubbaṃ kathetabbaṃ kathaṃ. Kā pana sāti? Dānādikathā. Tattha dānakathā tāva pacurajanesu pavattiyā sabbasādhāraṇattā, sukarattā, sīle patiṭṭhānassa upāyabhāvato ca ādito kathitā. Pariccāgasīlo hi puggalo pariggahavatthūsu nissaṅgabhāvato sukheneva sīlāni samādiyati, tattha ca suppatiṭṭhito hoti. Sīlena dāyakapaṭiggāhakavisuddhito parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato, kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato, bhogasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānakathānantaraṃ sīlakathā kathitā, tañce dānasīlaṃ vaṭṭanissitaṃ, ayaṃ bhavasampatti tassa phalanti dassanatthaṃ, imehi ca dānasīlamayehi paṇītapaṇītatarādibhedabhinnehi puññakiriyavatthūhi etā cātumahārājikādīsu paṇītapaṇītatarādibhedabhinnā aparimeyyā dibbabhogabhavasampattiyo hontīti dassanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ saggakathaṃ. Vatvā ayaṃ saggo rāgādīhi upakkiliṭṭho, sabbadā anupakkiliṭṭho ariyamaggoti dassanatthaṃ saggānantaraṃ maggakathā kathetabbā. Maggañca kathentena tadadhigamupāyadassanatthaṃ saggapariyāpannāpi, pageva itare sabbepi kāmā nāma bahvādīnavā, aniccā adhuvā, vipariṇāmadhammāti kāmānaṃ ādīnavo, hīnā, gammā, pothujjanikā, anariyā, anatthasañhitāti tesaṃ okāro lāmakabhāvo, sabbepi bhavā kilesānaṃ vatthubhūtāti tattha saṃkileso, sabbaso kilesavippamuttaṃ nibbānanti nekkhamme ānisaṃso ca kathetabboti ayamattho maggantīti ettha iti-saddena ādiatthajotakena bodhitoti veditabbaṃ.
「诸乐之因」:指现世之乐、来世之乐以及与涅槃相系之乐等一切乐的因。世间任何财富之乐,皆以布施为根本因,此理显而易见。而禅那、观、道、果、涅槃相应之乐,布施也确实是其亲依止缘。「诸成就之根本」:世间如地方王权、自在权势、七宝庄严的转轮王成就等人间种种成就,以及四大王天等诸天成就,及至其余一切成就,于此一切,布施即是根本,即是因。「诸受用之……」:指那些以可受用义而得名“受用”的可意色等,以及依此而起的受用乐。从予庇护义说,即是依止处。「遭不幸者」:指遭遇灾难之人。「救护」:是保护,由于能护人免遭灾难。「避难处」:是在被灾难逼恼时可藏身之处。「去处」:是应往之处。「归宿」:是皈依投靠之处。「依靠」:是不令人堕落而成为所依的支撑。「所缘支撑」:是可作依靠、可攀缘的支撑物。显示巴利原文
Sukhānaṃ nidānanti diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ, samparāyikānaṃ, nibbānapaṭisaṃyuttānañcāti sabbesampi sukhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Yañhi kiñci loke bhogasukhaṃ nāma, taṃ sabbaṃ dānanidānanti pākaṭo yamattho. Yaṃ pana taṃ jhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ sukhaṃ, tassāpi dānaṃ upanissayapaccayo hotiyeva. Sampattīnaṃ mūlanti yā imā loke padesarajjaṃ sirissariyaṃ sattaratanasamujjalacakkavattisampadāti evaṃpabhedā mānusikā sampattiyo, yā ca cātumahārājikacātumahārājādibhedā dibbasampattiyo, yā vā panaññāpi sampattiyo, tāsaṃ sabbāsaṃ idaṃ dānaṃ nāma mūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Bhogānanti bhuñjitabbaṭṭhena ‘‘bhogo’’ti laddhanāmānaṃ manāpiyarūpādīnaṃ, tannissayānañca upabhogasukhānaṃ. Avassayaṭṭhena patiṭṭhā. Visamagatassāti byasanappattassa. Tāṇanti rakkhā tato paripālanato. Leṇanti byasanehi paripāciyamānassa olīyanapadeso. Gatīti gantabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Parāyaṇanti paṭisaraṇaṃ. Avassayoti vinipatituṃ adento nissayo. Ārammaṇanti olubbhārammaṇaṃ.
「如宝狮子座」:即如同一切宝物所成、具足七支的大宝狮子座,极为珍贵,且绝不会令人堕落。「如大地」:正如大地,在众生所到的任何地方,皆能为其依止,令得安立。「如支撑绳」:譬如虚弱之人,支撑绳在其起立与站立时,都能予以支撑。同样,布施对众生于成就与生活中,不论生起或安住,皆成助缘。「以度脱苦难义」:即以度脱恶趣苦难为义。「以令完全安息义」:即对贪、悭等敌对灾祸,能从真实意义上令人得到安息。「以防护怖畏义」:即防护贫穷怖畏。「以悭吝垢等」:指以悭吝、贪、瞋、慢、疑、邪见等心的污垢。「以不染着义」:即无染污、不被染着。「对于它们」:指对于悭吝垢等那些心的垢秽。「即以这些难接近之义」:即凭这些功德而难以被接近。「以不令恐惧义」:即不被征服之性,无所恐惧。因为一位乐善好施的施主,在现世对任何事都不害怕,何况来世?这是以法义之名称说其人。「以有大力义」:指具大势力之特质。因为施主在……显示巴利原文
Ratanamayasīhāsanasadisanti sabbaratanamayasattaṅgamahāsīhāsanasadisaṃ mahagghaṃ hutvā sabbaso vinipatituṃ appadānato. Mahāpathavisadisaṃ gatagataṭṭhāne patiṭṭhāya labhāpanato. Ālambanarajjusadisanti yathā dubbalassa purisassa ālambanarajju uttiṭṭhato, tiṭṭhato ca upatthambho, evaṃ dānaṃ sattānaṃ sampattibhave uppattiyā, ṭhitiyā ca paccayabhāvato. Dukkhanittharaṇaṭṭhenāti duggatidukkhanittharaṇaṭṭhena. Samassāsanaṭṭhenāti lobhamacchariyādipaṭisattupaddavato sammadeva assāsanaṭṭhena. Bhayaparittāṇaṭṭhenāti dāliddiyabhayato paripālanaṭṭhena. Maccheramalādīhīti maccheralobhadosaissāvicikicchādiṭṭhi ādicittamalehi. Anupalittaṭṭhenāti anupakkiliṭṭhatāya. Tesanti maccheramalādikacavarānaṃ. Etehi eva durāsadaṭṭhena. Asantāsanaṭṭhenāti anabhibhavanīyatāya santāsābhāvena. Yo hi dāyako dānapati, so sampatipi kutoci na bhāyati, pageva āyatiṃ. Dhammasīsena puggalo vutto. Balavantaṭṭhenāti mahābalavatāya. Dāyako hi dānapati sampati pakkhabalena balavā hoti, āyatiṃ pana kāyabalādīhipi. Abhimaṅgalasammataṭṭhenāti ‘‘vaḍḍhikāraṇa’’nti abhisammatabhāvena. Vipattibhavato sampattibhavūpanayanaṃ khemantabhūmisampāpanaṃ, bhavasaṅgāmato yogakkhemasampāpanañca khemantabhūmisampāpanaṭṭho.
现在,为了显示布施不仅能成就那些在轮回中达到顶点的成就,也像还灭的成就(出世间法)一样能够达成,为了以菩提行的情况来显示布施的功德,所以又说了‘dānañ hī’(诚然,布施……)等文。其中,帝释、魔罗、梵天的成就纯粹是为了自利,而转轮王的成就则是为了自利、也为了利他。为了显示这个差别,所以把转轮王成就放在后面单独叙说。这三种成就是世间的,而接下来的则是出世间的,为了显示这一点,此后又说‘sāvakapāramīñāṇa’(声闻波罗蜜智)等。同样,为了显示殊胜、更殊胜、最殊胜的差别,依次第演说三种智慧。而这些智慧以布施为缘的道理,在前面已经说过。由此,应当知道布施也是梵天成就的助缘。显示巴利原文
Idāni dānaṃ vaṭṭagatā ukkaṃsappattā sampattiyo viya vivaṭṭagatāpi tā sampādetīti bodhicariyabhāvenapi dānaguṇe dassetuṃ ‘‘dānañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sakkamārabrahmasampattiyo attahitāya eva, cakkavattisampatti pana attahitāya, parahitāya cāti dassetuṃ sā tāsaṃ parato vuttā, etā lokiyā, imā pana lokuttarāti dassetuṃ tato paraṃ ‘‘sāvakapāramīñāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāpi ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhatarukkaṭṭhatamāti dassetuṃ kamena ñāṇattayaṃ vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ pana dānassa paccayabhāvo heṭṭhā vutto eva. Etenevassa brahmasampattiyāpi paccayabhāvo dīpitoti veditabbo.
所谓布施,是指以利益心或恭敬心,对应施者,将自己所有之物施舍给他人。因此,施主是对众生专怀利益心的人。所以,“他会伤害他人,或盗取他人之物”是不可能的事,因而说“正在布施的人,能受持戒律”。没有任何装饰品与戒相似,因为戒并非人造,而是一切时中都能带来殊胜的光彩。也没有任何花朵能与戒花相似,道理相同。也没有任何香气与戒香相似,于此可引用“旃檀、多伽罗等……”的偈颂(《法句》55),以及“那些久修戒者的戒香,在身坏之后也会随风飘散……”等经文(《本生》2.17.55)。戒对于众生,既是装身具,也是庄严,是香与涂香,还能带来令人见即欢喜的容貌。所以注释中说“由戒庄严……”等。显示巴利原文
Dānañca nāma dakkhiṇeyyesu hitajjhāsayena vā pūjanajjhāsayena vā attano santakassa paresaṃ pariccajanaṃ, tasmā dāyako sattesu ekantahitajjhāsayo purisapuggalo, so ‘‘paresaṃ hiṃsati, paresaṃ vā santakaṃ haratī’’ti aṭṭhānametanti āha ‘‘dānaṃ dadanto sīlaṃ samādātuṃ sakkotī’’ti. Sīlasadiso alaṅkāro natthīti akittimaṃ hutvā sabbakālaṃ sobhāvisesāvahattā. Sīlapupphasadisaṃ pupphaṃ natthīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sīlagandhasadiso gandho natthīti ettha ‘‘candanaṃ tagaraṃ vāpī’’tiādikā (dha. pa. 55) gāthā, ‘‘gandho isīnaṃ ciradikkhitānaṃ, kāyā cuto gacchati mālutenā’’tiādikā (jā. 2.17.55) ca vattabbā . Sīlañhi sattānaṃ ābharaṇañceva alaṅkāro ca gandhavilepanañca parassa dassanīyabhāvāvahañca. Tenāha ‘‘sīlālaṅkārena hī’’tiādi.
“得此天界”这一句,是指以中等的意欲等所发起的戒而说。因此,帝释天王这样说过:显示巴利原文
‘‘Ayaṃ saggo labbhatī’’ti idaṃ majjhimehi chandādīhi āraddhaṃ sīlaṃ sandhāyāha. Tenāha sakko devarājā –
以低劣的梵行,投生于刹帝利(王族)中;
行中道梵行得生天界,修最上梵行则得究竟清净。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjati; Majjhimena ca devattaṃ, uttamena visujjhatī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.429);
“Iṭṭho”(可爱),即快乐;“kanto”(可意),即令人喜爱;“manāpo”(悦意),即令心增长。为显示它这可爱等特相,经文接着说道“常于此游戏……”等。“Niccaṃ”(常),指一切时;“kīḷā”(游戏),指与欲乐相应的快乐安住。此处的“Sampattiyo”(成就),指财富的成就。所谓“Dibbaṃ”(天的),是指属于天界的生存状态。“Sukhaṃ”(乐),指身乐与心乐。“Dibbasampattiṃ”(天成就),即天界的生存状态,诸如寿的成就、容貌的成就、名声的成就、自在的成就,以及色身等方面的成就。末句的“Evamādi”(如是等)中,“等”字即指由夜摩天等天人所受用的种种天界成就。显示巴利原文
Iṭṭhoti sukho, kantoti kamanīyo, manāpoti manavaḍḍhanako, taṃ panassa iṭṭhādibhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘niccamettha kīḷā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Niccanti sabbakālaṃ kīḷāti kāmūpasaṃhitā sukhavihārā. Sampattiyoti bhogasampattiyo. Dibbanti dibbabhavaṃ devalokapariyāpannaṃ. Sukhanti kāyikaṃ, cetasikañca sukhaṃ. Dibbasampattinti dibbabhavaṃ āyusampattiṃ, vaṇṇayasaissariyasampattiṃ, rūpādisampattiñca. Evamādīti ādi-saddena yāmādīhi anubhavitabbaṃ dibbasampattiṃ vadati.
“Appassādā”(少味),即毫无滋味,因为对于如实观察的智者而言,其中并无任何可品尝的滋味。说它们“Bahudukkhā”(多苦),是指无论在现在还是未来,都充满大苦,因其连着极为深重的苦患。“Bahupāyāsā”(多灾患),指它们招来种种不幸与过患。“Ettha”(于此),即在这些欲之中。“Bhiyyo”(格外地),指非常多。“Doso”(过失),指由无常、少味等性质所成的染污相,正因为如此,欲不能令智者的心感到满足。或者,“ādīnavo”(过患)由“ādi”(开始)和“nava”(新)组成,即“有开始和新的转起”,故称过患,此实为说其最极可悲;当人们如实审察欲望时,欲便显现此可悲之相。“Lāmakabhāvo”(鄙劣的状态),指其低劣性,因为那是非最上之人所热衷从事的,而不是最上之人所行的。而“Saṃkilissantī”(会染污),指它们令人受逼迫、受热恼。至于“Pariḷāho”(热恼)……显示巴利原文
Appassādāti nirassādā paṇḍitehi yathābhūtaṃ passantehi tattha assādetabbatābhāvato. Bahudukkhāti mahādukkhā sampati, āyatiñca vipuladukkhānubandhattā. Bahupāyāsāti anekavidhaparissayā. Etthāti kāmesu. Bhiyyoti bahuṃ. Dosoti aniccatādinā, appassādatādinā ca dūsitabhāvo, yato te viññūnaṃ cittaṃ nārādhenti. Atha vā ādīnaṃ vāti pavattatīti ādīnavo, paramakapaṇatā, tathā ca kāmā yathābhūtaṃ paccavekkhantānaṃ paccupatiṭṭhanti. Lāmakabhāvoti nihīnabhāvo aseṭṭhehi sevitabbattā, seṭṭhehi na sevitabbattā ca. Saṃkilissananti vibādhetabbatā upatāpetabbatā. Nekkhamme ānisaṃsanti ettha yattakā kāmesu ādīnavā, tappaṭipakkhato tattakā nekkhamme ānisaṃsā. Api ca ‘‘nekkhammaṃ nāmetaṃ asambādhaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ, nikkhantaṃ kāmehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmasaññāya, nikkhantaṃ kāmavitakkehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmapariḷāhehi, nikkhantaṃ byāpādato’’tiādinā (sārattha. ṭī. 3.26 mahāvagge) nayena nekkhamme ānisaṃse pakāsesi, pabbajjāya, jhānādīsu ca guṇe vibhāvesi vaṇṇesi.
依前所说之义,此处未释之词——如“kallacitte”等——释义如下。其中,“kallacitta”指适合作业的心。因前段开示中所述不信等心之过患已除,心已成为可纳受后续开示之法器,故称堪任作业之心。实则,不信等即是内心之病,彼时病已消失,故此心亦可谓无病之心。因离邪见、我慢等烦恼,故成柔和之心。因离爱欲等,故成无五盖障之心。因与广大喜、悦相应,故成昂扬之心。在此状态中,因具足信,亦成净信心。此处应作如是连结:世尊在了知“此时……”之际。复次,亦可如是解:称为“kallacitta”,是因远离爱欲而为无病之心;称为“muducitta”(柔和心),是因远离嗔恚,住于慈爱而不再刚硬;称为“vinīvaraṇacitta”(无盖障心),是因远离掉举与追悔,除遣散乱,故心不被覆盖;称为“udaggacitta”(昂扬心)显示巴利原文
Vuttanayanti ettha yaṃ avuttanayaṃ ‘‘kallacitte’’tiādi, tattha kallacitteti kammaniyacitte, heṭṭhā pavattitadesanāya assaddhiyādīnaṃ cittadosānaṃ vigatattā uparidesanāya bhājanabhāvūpagamanena kammakkhamacitteti attho. Assaddhiyādayo hi yasmā cittassa rogabhūtā tadā te vigatā, tasmā arogacitteti attho. Diṭṭhimānādikilesavigamanena muducitte. Kāmacchandādivigamena vinīvaraṇacitte. Sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ uḷārapītipāmojjayogena udaggacitte. Tattha saddhāsampattiyā pasannacitte. Yadā ca bhagavā aññāsīti sambandho. Atha vā kallacitteti kāmacchandavigamena arogacitte. Muducitteti byāpādavigamena mettāvasena akathinacitte. Vinīvaraṇacitteti uddhaccakukkuccavigamena vikkhepassa vigatattā tena apihitacitte. Udaggacitteti thinamiddhavigamena sampaggahitavasena alīnacitte. Pasannacitteti vicikicchāvigamena sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ adhimuttacitte, evampettha attho veditabbo.
经中说“犹如……”等,是以譬喻显示他们舍断杂染及圣道生起的情形。“Apagatakāḷakaṃ”谓已去除黑色斑点。“Sammadevā”谓善好。“Rajanaṃ”指染料,即蓝、黄等色彩。“Paṭiggaṇheyyā”谓能受持,变得光亮明净。“于彼同一座”谓即在同一坐处,以此显示他们为易观者、利根者,属乐行道、速通达之类。“Virajaṃ”(离尘),因去除了能引至恶趣的欲贪等尘垢,故说离尘。由于完全去掉了一切邪见与疑之垢秽,故说“Vītamalaṃ”(离垢)。复次,因无初道所断之烦恼尘,故为离尘;因舍离五种犯戒之垢,故为离垢。关于“Dhammacakkhuṃ”(法眼),在《梵摩寿经》中是指下三道,在《小罗睺罗教诫经》中是指漏尽,而在此处,则是指入流道。经文说“凡集起之法,彼一切皆息灭之法”,这正是在开示它生起的行相。若问:道智岂不是以无为法为所缘,而非以有为法为所缘吗?确实如此。然而,因为道智是以显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpī’’tiādinā upamāvasena nesaṃ saṃkilesappahānaṃ, ariyamagguppādañca dasseti. Apagatakāḷakanti vigatakāḷakaṃ. Sammadevāti suṭṭhu eva. Rajananti nīlapītādiraṅgajātaṃ. Paṭiggaṇheyyāti gaṇheyya pabhassaraṃ bhaveyya. Tasmiṃyeva āsaneti tissameva nisajjāyaṃ, etena nesaṃ lahuvipassakatā, tikkhapaññatā, sukhapaṭipadākhippābhiññatā ca dassitā hoti. Virajanti apāyagamanīyarāgarajādīnaṃ vigamena virajaṃ. Anavasesadiṭṭhivicikicchāmalāpagamanena vītamalaṃ. Paṭhamamaggavajjhakilesarajābhāvena vā virajaṃ. Pañcavidhadussīlyamalāpagamanena vītamalaṃ. Dhammacakkhunti brahmāyusutte (ma. ni. 2.383) heṭṭhimā tayo maggā vuttā, cūḷarāhulovāde (ma. ni. 3.416) āsavakkhayo, idha pana sotāpattimaggo adhippeto. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti tassa uppattiākāradassananti. Nanu ca maggañāṇaṃ asaṅkhatadhammārammaṇaṃ, na saṅkhatadhammārammaṇanti? Saccametaṃ. Yasmā taṃ nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena sabbasaṅkhataṃ paṭivijjhantaṃ uppajjati, tasmā tathā vuttaṃ.
“清净的布”此譬喻,其对应如下:布譬如心,布被外来垢染所污的情形,犹如心被贪等烦恼染污的情形;洗衣板譬如次第说法;水譬如信;浸水后以碱、牛粪灰等除去黑点的洗衣过程,譬如先以信油反复浸润,依念、定、慧令烦恼松动,再通过闻等修行而净化心的精勤;依彼过程除去布上种种黑点,譬如依精勤而暂时镇伏烦恼;染料譬如圣道;以染料使清净之布鲜艳明净,譬如以圣道使已镇伏烦恼的心彻底清净。宣说“见法”之后,由于“见”除智见外尚有他义,为遮这些,故说“得法”。而“得”除智之成就外亦有他义,为显差别,故说“知法”。然“知法”亦可仅为知法之一分,为示无余了知,故说“入法”,以此表明他们即是现观四圣谛。因道智以一次现观便完成遍知等用,毫无遗漏地遍入并通达四谛法。余如前说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suddhaṃ vattha’’nti nidassitaupamāyaṃ idaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ vatthaṃ viya cittaṃ, vatthassa āgantukamalehi kiliṭṭhabhāvo viya cittassa rāgādimalehi saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvo , dhovanasilā viya anupubbikathā, udakaṃ viya saddhā, udake temetvā ūsagomayachārikābharehi kāḷakapadese samucchinditvā vatthassa dhovanapayogo viya saddhāsinehena temetvā temetvā satisamādhipaññāhi dose sithilī katvā sutādividhinā cittassa sodhane vīriyārambho, tena payogena vatthe nānākāḷakāpagamo viya vīriyārambhena kilesavikkhambhanaṃ, raṅgajātaṃ viya ariyamaggo, tena suddhassa vatthassa pabhassarabhāvo viya vikkhambhitakilesassa cittassa maggena pariyodapananti. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammā’’ti vatvā dassanaṃ nāma ñāṇadassanato aññampi atthīti taṃ nivattanatthaṃ ‘‘pattadhammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Patti ca ñāṇasampattito aññampi vijjatīti tato visesadassanatthaṃ ‘‘viditadhammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā pana viditadhammatā dhammesu ekadesenāpi hotīti nippadesato viditabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pariyogāḷhadhammā’’ti vuttaṃ, tena nesaṃ saccābhisambodhiṃyeva vibhāveti. Maggañāṇañhi ekābhisamayavasena pariññādikiccaṃ sādhentaṃ nippadesatova catusaccadhammaṃ samantato ogāhantaṃ paṭivijjhatīti. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
77 “衣等施”是指布施衣等资具。应知:若有人将八种资具,或仅将钵与衣,施予须陀洹等圣者,或具戒的凡夫,并发愿“愿此资具施成为未来获得善来比丘身的缘”,当他具足成就时,即在诸佛面前,证得神通所成资具。正如得神通的长老那般,具足威仪——此即其意趣所在。显示巴利原文
77.Cīvaradānādīnīti cīvarādiparikkhāradānaṃ sandhāyāha. Yo hi cīvarādike aṭṭha parikkhāre, pattacīvarameva vā sotāpannādiariyassa, puthujjanasseva vā sīlasampannassa datvā ‘‘idaṃ parikkhāradānaṃ anāgate ehibhikkhubhāvāya paccayo hotū’’ti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapesi, tassa ca sati adhikārasampattiyaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve iddhimayaparikkhāralābhāya saṃvattatīti veditabbaṃ. Vassasatikattherā viya ākappasampannāti adhippāyo.
“教示”:善加令其现见而教示。“此世利益”:指属于此世的、名为五蕴的意义之利益。“他世利益”也是同样的道理。“教导”:从共相与自相方面加以教导。因此说“无常”等。其中,由于有已还归于灭,故教示无常;由于受到生灭的逼迫,故教示苦;由于不得自在,故教示无我。以积聚之义,教示具有恼害等相的五蕴。以无我、无命之义,教示具有眼等自性的十八界。教示作为门与所缘、具有眼等自性的十二处。教示以无明等为始、老死为终的十二缘法,亦即缘起。复于色蕴,如前所述,从缘而显有四种,从刹那而显有一种,共为五种相。“如是”一词,系收束“五种相”之说。教示:“iti”乃表例举之义。地狱:开示一切地狱,分八大地狱、十六小地狱。畜生道:开示无足、二足、四足、多足等类别的走兽、飞禽、爬虫等种种畜生世间。饿鬼界:开示依食饮而饿者、食呕吐物者、受他施活命者、被火灼而焦渴者等不同种类的饿鬼众生世间。阿修罗身:黑阿修罗众。如此先宣说属于恶趣的他世利益,继而宣说属于善趣的他世利益,故说“三种善异熟”等。至于韦哈巴喇天与遍净天,因无想天及无色界中无可显示,显示巴利原文
Sandassesīti suṭṭhu paccakkhaṃ katvā dassesi. Idhalokatthanti idhalokabhūtaṃ khandhapañcakasaṅkhātamatthaṃ. Paralokatthanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Dassesīti sāmaññalakkhaṇato, salakkhaṇato ca dassesi. Tenāha ‘‘anicca’’ntiādi. Tattha hutvā abhāvato aniccanti dassesi. Udayabbayapaṭipīḷanato dukkhanti dassesi. Avasavattanato anattāti dassesi. Ime ruppanādilakkhaṇā pañcakkhandhāti rāsaṭṭhena khandhe dassesi. Ime cakkhādisabhāvā nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena aṭṭhārasa dhātuyoti dassesi. Imāni cakkhādisabhāvāneva dvārārammaṇabhūtāni dvādasa āyatanānīti dassesi. Ime avijjādayo jarāmaraṇapariyosānā dvādasa paccayadhammā paṭiccasamuppādoti dassesi. Rūpakkhandhassa heṭṭhā vuttanayena paccayato cattāri, khaṇato ekanti imāni pañca lakkhaṇāni dassesi. Tathāti iminā ‘‘pañca lakkhaṇānī’’ti padaṃ ākaḍḍhati. Dassentoti iti-saddo nidassanattho, evanti attho. Nirayanti aṭṭhamahānirayasoḷasaussadanirayappabhedaṃ sabbaso nirayaṃ dassesi. Tiracchānayoninti apadadvipadacatuppadabahuppadādibhedaṃ migapasupakkhisarīsapādivibhāgaṃ nānāvidhaṃ tiracchānalokaṃ. Pettivisayanti khuppipāsikavantāsikaparadattūpajīvinijjhāmataṇhikādibhedabhinnaṃ nānāvidhaṃ petasattalokaṃ. Asurakāyanti kālakañcikāsuranikāyaṃ. Evaṃ tāva duggatibhūtaṃ paralokatthaṃ vatvā idāni sugatibhūtaṃ vattuṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ kusalānaṃ vipāka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Vehapphale subhakiṇṇeyeva saṅgahetvā asaññīsu, arūpīsu ca sampattiyā dassetabbāya abhāvato duviññeyyatāya ‘‘navannaṃ brahmalokāna’’ntveva vuttaṃ.
“令执取”:令他们纳受并奉行那些法。显示巴利原文
Gaṇhāpesīti te dhamme samādinne kārāpesi.
“策励”意指:对于已受持的诸法,正如无益之法会衰退、消失,有益之法会增长、清净,依此理而令他们生起精进,所以说为“激扬”。为了说明这种策励是如何产生的,才说到“此世的利益及……”等。“一再令其悚惧”:通过反复熟习而再三激励。“如已证得而说”:令听者如同亲证此义。对于堪受教化者,诸佛所开示的义理,会比亲证还要明显地呈现。因此世尊被如此称赞:显示巴利原文
Samuttejanaṃ nāma samādinnadhammānaṃ yathā anupakārakā dhammā parihāyanti, pahīyanti ca, upakārakā dhammā parivaḍḍhanti, visujjhanti ca, tathā nesaṃ ussāhuppādananti āha ‘‘abbhussāhesī’’ti. Yathā pana taṃ ussāhuppādanaṃ hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idhalokatthañcevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tāsetvā tāsetvāti paribyattabhāvāpādanena tejetvā tejetvā. Adhigataṃ viya katvāti yesaṃ katheti, tehi tamatthaṃ paccakkhato anubhuyyamānaṃ viya katvā. Veneyyānañhi buddhehi pakāsiyamāno attho paccakkhatopi pākaṭataro hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tathā hi bhagavā evaṃ thomīyati –
纵然此世间被十一种火焚烧,
却被痴迷所缠缚,不曾如是生起悚惧;
听闻大仙所说、与过患相连的话语,
诸佛之语,甚至较之亲证更为极明显。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ādittopi ayaṃ loko, ekādasahi aggibhi; Na tathā yāti saṃvegaṃ, sammohapaliguṇṭhito. Sutvādīnavasaññuttaṃ, yathā vācaṃ mahesino; Paccakkhatopi buddhānaṃ, vacanaṃ suṭṭhu pākaṭa’’nti.
因此他说「三十二种业因与二十五种大恐怖的分别」等语。三十二种业因应依照《苦蕴经》中「他们砍手……」等所示的方法来了解。二十五种大恐怖应依照各处经典中「生的恐怖、老的恐怖、病的恐怖、死的恐怖」等所示的方法来了解。「杀戮刑具」是用于持续殴打的粗棍,也就是被称为「极刑」的东西。显示巴利原文
Tenāha ‘‘dvattiṃsakammakāraṇapañcavīsatimahābhayappabhedañhī’’tiādi. Dvattiṃsakammakāraṇāni ‘‘hatthampi chindantī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.178) dukkhakkhandhasutte āgatanayena veditabbāni. Pañcavīsatimahābhayāni ‘‘jātibhayaṃ jarābhayaṃ byādhibhayaṃ maraṇabhaya’’ntiādinā (cūḷani. 123) tattha tattha sutte āgatanayena veditabbāni. Āghātanabhaṇḍikā adhikuṭṭanakaḷiṅgaraṃ, yaṃ ‘‘accādhāna’’ntipi vuccati.
“以已得功德而质问”:通过展示“经由证得种种功德,这也是你们所获得的,这就是利益”这样现前的事实,他仿佛在质问:“在此之前,有过这样的事吗?”因此说:“他使之成为大利益而宣说。”显示巴利原文
Paṭiladdhaguṇena codesīti ‘‘taṃtaṃguṇādhigamena ayampi tumhehi paṭiladdho, ānisaṃso ayampī’’ti paccakkhato dassento ‘‘kiṃ ito pubbe evarūpaṃ atthī’’ti codento viya ahosi. Tenāha ‘‘mahānisaṃsaṃ katvā kathesī’’ti.
“以及以彼为缘的疲劳”:指以诸行的流转为因,在各各有情相续中生起的折磨、冲击与损害。“此处”:指前面为了证得初道而宣说的教法之中。由于一切行的一切运作彻底寂灭,故称为“寂静”。因为带来无上安乐、令人永不厌倦,故称为“殊胜”。由于能防护整个轮回的灾祸,从救护的意义上,称为“救护所”。对于那些因此心生厌离的人,它是藏身之处,故称为“洞窟”。以“等”字,在这里包含了“归趣、皈依、最上安稳”等含义。显示巴利原文
Tappaccayañca kilamathanti saṅkhārapavattihetukaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sattasantāne uppajjanakaparissamaṃ saṃvighātaṃ vihesaṃ. Idhāti heṭṭhā paṭhamamaggādhigamatthāya kathāya. Sabbasaṅkhārūpasamabhāvato santaṃ. Atittikaraparamasukhatāya paṇītaṃ. Sakalasaṃsārabyasanato tāyanatthena tāṇaṃ. Tato nibbindahadayānaṃ nilīyanaṭṭhānatāya leṇaṃ. Ādi-saddena gatipaṭisaraṇaṃ paramassāsoti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
大众出家之注释显示巴利原文
Mahājanakāyapabbajjāvaṇṇanā
80 80. 因为当时没有足够数量的比丘,所以说“因僧团未圆满”。因为那时只有两位上首弟子。显示巴利原文
80. Saṅghappahonakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ abhāvā ‘‘saṅghassa aparipuṇṇattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dve aggasāvakā eva hi tadā ahesuṃ.
开许游行(cārikā-anujānana)的注释显示巴利原文
Cārikāanujānanavaṇṇanā
86 对于“这是何时产生的?”这一问题,先用“从正觉时起……”等语简要作答之后,为了进一步详细说明,才说了“据说世尊……”等语。将“从正觉时起”与“七年七月七日”连接起来理解,意思是:从正觉时起,为了照料父亲而在此地住了七年七月七日;而之所以如此,也是因为当时没有可度化之人。他让人用粗麻布遮蔽外面,用布料遮挡里面,又在上面覆盖布料,并在其下方设置金钱……华盖。“花丛树”:指用花鬘缠绕成小牛形状的装饰。“在香中间”:指在盛满香料的罐子中间。“诸花”:指装满罐子的水生花,以及遍布庭院等处的陆生花。显示巴利原文
86. ‘‘Kadā udapādī’’ti pucchaṃ ‘‘sambodhito’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vissajjetvā puna taṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pitu saṅgahaṃ karonto vihāsi sambodhito ‘‘satta saṃvaccharāni satta māse satta divase’’ti ānetvā sambandho, tañca kho veneyyānaṃ tadā abhāvato. Kilañjehi bahi chādāpetvā, vatthehi anto paṭicchādāpetvā, upari ca vatthehi chādāpetvā, tassa heṭṭhā suvaṇṇa…pe… vitānaṃ kārāpetvā. Mālāvacchaketi pupphamālāhi vacchākārena veṭhite. Gandhantareti cāṭibharitagandhassa antare. Pupphānīti cāṭiādibharitāni jalajapupphāni ceva caṅkotakādibharitāni thalajapupphāni ca.
虽然这位国王是佛的父亲,但诸佛乃世间所尊,不应受任何人掌控,反而是他们令他人随顺于自己的教化。因此国王说:“我不向比丘僧团行布施。”显示巴利原文
Kāmañcāyaṃ rājā buddhapitā, tathāpi buddhā nāma lokagaruno, na te kenaci vase vattetabbā, atha kho te eva pare attano vase vattenti, tasmā rājā ‘‘nāhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ demī’’ti āha.
“布施之门”:指行布施的方法,即布施的方式。“现在我的布施未被允许”意思是:现在我的布施虽未被允准,但他们并没有不允许。显示巴利原文
Dānamukhanti dānakaraṇūpāyaṃ, dānavattanti attho. Na dāni me anuññātāti idāni me dānaṃ na anuññātā, no na anujānantīti attho.
“战栗维生”意为痛苦的生活与贫穷。显示巴利原文
Paritassanajīvitanti dukkhajīvikā dāliddiyanti attho.
“能供给一切比丘”的意思是:世尊能够按份施与六十八万比丘,但并非由于他遍知一切比丘而施与。因此说“将军也施与了自己的应施之物”。“于正妃位”指正宫王妃之位。显示巴利原文
Sabbesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pahosīti bhagavato aṭṭhasaṭṭhi ca bhikkhusatasahassānaṃ bhāgato dātuṃ pahosi, na sabbesaṃ pariyattabhāvena. Tenāha ‘‘senāpatipi attano deyyadhammaṃ adāsī’’ti. Jeṭṭhikaṭṭhāneti jeṭṭhikadeviṭṭhāne.
“如法制作后”:安置了密探之后。“清净”:纯净。“殊胜”:广大、殊妙,此处用的是中性词,如同“于一边”等词一样。“破碎后”:压碎、紧压。“唯用净酥乳等”:只用内部所含的净酥乳等,即只用取自自己牛等所获得的酥等。显示巴利原文
Tathevakatvāti carapurise ṭhapetvā. Sucinti suddhaṃ. Paṇītanti uḷāraṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ ‘‘ekamanta’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 2) viya. Bhañjitvāti madditvā, pīḷetvāti attho. Jātisappikhīrādīhiyevāti antojātasappikhīrādīhiyeva, amhākameva gāviādito gahitasappiādīhiyevāti attho.
90 能忍他人毁谤、他人加害、冷热等苦,以及功德之损,如是堪忍、承受、安住者,即名为忍。而此忍,由于能特异地焚烧、消灭、摧毁与戒等相违的诸法,故称最上、最胜之苦行。因此说:「安忍名为最上苦行」。说「安忍」,是为了区别于法随忍。「忍受、忍耐」即是「堪忍」,因为文字学家解释「堪忍」一词即是忍的同义词,故说「即是忍的同义词」等。「以一切行相」,是指寂静、殊胜、微妙、安稳等一切方式。「彼非名为出家者」,是因为应出离之法并未出离。此亦为第三句的同义语,意义一致。显示巴利原文
90. Parāpavādaṃ, parāpakāraṃ, sītuṇhādibhedañca guṇāparādhaṃ khamati sahati adhivāsetīti khanti. Sā pana yasmā sīlādīnaṃ paṭipakkhadhamme savisesaṃ tapati santapati vidhamatīti paramaṃ uttamaṃ tapo. Tenāha ‘‘adhivāsanakhanti nāma paramaṃ tapo’’ti. ‘‘Adhivāsanakhantī’’ti iminā dhammanijjhānakkhantito viseseti. Titikkhanaṃ khamanaṃ titikkhā.Akkharacintakā hi khamāyaṃ titikkhā-saddaṃ vaṇṇenti. Tenevāha ‘‘khantiyā eva vevacana’’ntiādi. Sabbākārenāti santapaṇītanipuṇasivakhemādinā sabbappakārena. So pabbajito nāma na hoti pabbājitabbadhammassa apabbājanato. Tasseva tatiyapadassa vevacanaṃ anatthantarattā.
以「确实不……」等语,开显其义。以最上义称为「胜」(paramaṃ),因「para」一词有最胜之义,例如「知补特伽罗之胜劣者」(《增支部》7.68;《导论》118)等处。「para」为「其他」义。今取「para」一词「其他」的同义词来显示意义,故说「或者」等。「垢秽」即罪恶之垢秽。「未出离」指未拔出、未舍离。「已寂灭」指已寂灭诸恶法,因为说:「已寂灭诸恶故,名为沙门」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Na hī’’tiādinā taṃ evatthaṃ vivarati. Uttamatthena paramanti vuccati para-saddassa seṭṭhavācakattā, ‘‘puggalaparoparaññū’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.68; netti. 118) viya. Paranti aññaṃ. Idāni para-saddaṃ aññapariyāyameva gahetvā atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Malassāti pāpamalassa. Apabbājitattāti anīhaṭattā anirākatattā . Samitattāti nirodhitattā tesaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ. ‘‘Samitattā hi pāpānaṃ samaṇoti pavuccatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ.
再者,世尊为比丘们诵巴帝摩卡时,由于巴帝摩卡之教说以戒为精要,而戒的过患尤其在于相违分,为了显示降伏相违分的方法,世尊一开始就说「忍是最上苦行」,由此说明了违逆不可意之事的对治方法;而通过取「堪忍」一词,则说明了可意之事的对治方法。以此两者,显示了降伏所生喜乐而安住的意义。因为熄灭了渴爱之林,诸佛说涅槃为最胜。其中,取「忍」表示加行无有败坏;取「堪忍」表示意乐无有败坏。同样,取「忍」表示能忍受他人的过失;取「堪忍」表示对于他人不造过失。这样从相顺的因由展示了巴帝摩卡后,现在再从相违的方面来显示,所以说了「确实不……」等。由此说明:正如杀害有情、以土块木杖等加以恼害,这称为「伤他、害他」;同样地,偷盗他们根本所有的财物、侵犯他人妻女、妄语、离间彼此、以粗恶语刺伤痛处、无义杂语、贪求他人财产、起断灭见、邪执等,也都是伤他与害他。因此,凡是造作任何不善业道与不善业者,彼即非真正出家,亦非真正沙门。显示巴利原文
Apica bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkhaṃ uddisanto pātimokkhakathāya ca sīlapadhānattā sīlassa ca visesato doso paṭipakkhoti tassa niggaṇhanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ādito ‘‘khantī paramaṃ tapo’’ti āha, tena aniṭṭhassa paṭihananūpāyo vutto, titikkhāgahaṇena pana iṭṭhassa, tadubhayenapi uppannaṃ ratiṃ abhibhuyya viharatīti ayamattho dassitoti. Taṇhāvānassa vūpasamanato nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhā. Tattha khantiggahaṇena payogavipattiyā abhāvo dassito, titikkhāgahaṇena āsayavipattiyā abhāvo. Tathā khantiggahaṇena parāparādhasahatā, titikkhāgahaṇena paresu anaparajjhanā dassitā. Evaṃ kāraṇamukhena anvayato pātimokkhaṃ dassetvā idāni byatirekato taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tena yathā sattānaṃ jīvitā voropanaṃ, pāṇileḍḍudaṇḍādīhi vibādhanañca ‘‘parūpaghāto, paraviheṭhana’’nti vuccati, evaṃ tesaṃ mūlasāpateyyāvaharaṇaṃ, dāraparāmasanaṃ, visaṃvādanaṃ, aññamaññabhedanaṃ, pharusavacanena mammaghaṭṭanaṃ, niratthakavippalāpo , parasantakagijjhanaṃ, ucchedavindanaṃ, micchābhinivesanañcaupaghāto, viheṭhanañca hotīti yassa kassaci akusalassa kammapathassa, kammassa ca karaṇena pabbajito, samaṇo ca na hotīti dasseti.
「一切不善」:指摄于全部十二种不善心生起的所有有过失的法。 「造作」:指在自相续中令这些不善生起;因此,彻底遮止造作即「不造作」,而说为「不让它生起」。 由于随后将说「这是诸佛的教法」,此处的「善」即指圣道法,以及作为彼资粮的三地善法。 因为「善」有「令觉知」的含义,故称为「四地善」。 「具足戒」:即令具足,也就是其证得,因此说「获得」。 「令心照耀」:即令心显露光辉、令心全面清净。因为证得最上道者,其心方为彻底清净;于最上果刹那,心已清净,无需再清净。因此,从究竟清净的意义上说「这是由阿拉汉道所得」。 意思是:通过分分舍断等方式,舍弃了一切恶。又由于「戒律仪」一词已包含三地善法,其它舍断亦被包摄其中,因此「一切」这个词得以成立。 「以止观」:以世间与出世间的止、观。 「成就」:即令其圆满达成。应知:此成就是由作为因的止观与作为果的止观而成就;不仅同时生起的止观能成就,更何况先前已成就的止观。显示巴利原文
Sabbākusalassāti sabbassāpi dvādasākusalacittuppādasaṅgahitassa sāvajjadhammassa. Karaṇaṃ nāma tassa attano santāne uppādananti tappaṭikkhepato akaraṇaṃ ‘‘anuppādana’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kusalassā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti vakkhamānattā ariyamaggadhamme, tesañca sambhārabhūte tebhūmakakusaladhamme sambodhetīti āha ‘‘catubhūmakakusalassā’’ti. Upasampadāti upasampādanaṃ, taṃ pana tassa samadhigamoti āha ‘‘paṭilābho’’ti. Cittajotananti cittassa pabhassarabhāvakaraṇaṃ sabbaso parisodhanaṃ. Yasmā aggamaggasamaṅgino cittaṃ sabbaso pariyodapīyati nāma, aggaphalakkhaṇe pana pariyodapitaṃ hoti puna pariyodapetabbatāya abhāvato, iti pariniṭṭhitapariyodapanataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘taṃ pana arahattena hotī’’ti. Sabbapāpaṃ pahāya tadaṅgādivasenevāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Sīlasaṃvarenā’’ti hi iminā tebhūmakassāpi saṅgahe itarappahānānampi saṅgaho hotīti, evañca katvā sabbaggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti . Samathavipassanāhīti lokiyalokuttarāhi samathavipassanāhi. Sampādetvāti nipphādetvā. Sampādanañcettha hetubhūtāhi phalabhūtassa sahajātāhipi, pageva purimasiddhāhīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「对任何人」:指对低劣等任何众生、对任何责难,由此遮止了哪怕出于戏笑或欲乐之心而作的责难。 「不造伤害」:此处同样应引入「对任何人」来关联理解。 「以身」仅是举例,因为即使是通过意,对他人生起无义思惟等伤害也应当避免。或者,此处的「以身」也应包括无色身,而不仅仅指能举手投足的身和业生身。 「巴帝摩卡」:因为在戒中它特别殊胜、居于首要,故称巴帝摩卡。所谓「最极解脱」,只是用不同的前缀表达同一个词。这样从词源解释后,再以真实义说为「最上戒」。 通过「护」等词来说明:由守护、保护,由极其解脱、极其释放,故是「巴帝摩卡」——因它能从恶中极大地令解脱,因此是「极解脱」,这是就相的作者而假说的。 或者这样理解:任何人护持此巴帝摩卡律仪戒,正受之后不加违犯地守持,彼称为「护者」,安住巴帝摩卡律仪中,他令解脱,故是「巴帝摩卡」。 以上是此处的略义。若广说,巴帝摩卡的含义应按照《清净道论》注释中所说的方法来了解。显示巴利原文
Kassacīti hīnādīsu kassaci sattassa kassaci upavādassa, tena davakamyatāyapi upavadanaṃ paṭikkhipati. Upaghātassa akaraṇanti etthāpi ‘‘kassacī’’ti ānetvā sambandho. Kāyenāti ca nidassanamattametaṃ manasāpi paresaṃ anatthacintanādivasena upaghātakaraṇassa vajjetabbattā. Kāyenāti vā ettha arūpakāyassāpi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo, na copanakāyakarajakāyānameva. Pa atimokkhanti pakārato ativiya sīlesu mukhyabhūtaṃ. ‘‘Atipamokkha’’nti tameva padaṃ upasaggabyattayena vadati. Evaṃ bhedato padavaṇṇanaṃ katvā tatvato vadati ‘‘uttamasīla’’nti. ‘‘Pāti vā’’tiādinā pālanato rakkhaṇato ativiya mokkhanato ativiya mocanato pātimokkhanti dasseti. ‘‘Pāpā ati mokkhetīti atimokkho’’ti nimittassa kattubhāvena upacaritabbato. Yo vā nanti yo vā puggalo naṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ pāti samādiyitvā avikopento rakkhati, taṃ ‘‘pātī’’ti laddhanāmaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhitaṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkhanti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana pātimokkhapadassa attho visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.14) vuttanayena veditabbo.
「知量」是指在食物上知量。然而,这特别应依资具依止戒来把握,因此说「依受用与受持而知量」。若依活命遍净戒来把握,也应说「依寻求与施舍而知量」。「远离人群杂沓」即远离与人群的杂沓,意为避开人烟、无喧闹的闲静处。这里彰显了四资具知足,因为资具知足与其余二者共通,通过相摄的方法而显发出来。「为得八等至自在」:这是通过显示目的,说明为了什么而愿求受用闲静的坐卧具,也就是所谓的增上心随行。这里的八等至,是指作为观前行的等至,并非泛泛的任何一种,因此应知这也显发了全部的增上心随行。显示巴利原文
Mattaññutāti bhojane mattaññutā, sā pana visesato paccayasannissitasīlavasena gahetabbāti āha ‘‘paṭiggahaṇaparibhogavasena pamāṇaññutā’’ti. Ājīvapārisuddhisīlavasenāpi gayhamāne ‘‘pariyesanavissajjanavasenā’’tipi vattabbaṃ. Saṅghaṭṭanavirahitanti janasaṅghaṭṭanavirahitaṃ, nirajanasambādhaṃ vivittanti attho. Catupaccayasantoso dīpito paccayasantosatāsāmaññena itaradvayassāpi lakkhaṇahāranayena jotitabhāvato. ‘‘Aṭṭhasamāpattivasibhāvāyā’’ti iminā payojanadassanavasena yadatthaṃ vivittasenāsanasevanaṃ icchitaṃ, so adhicittānuyogo vutto. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo cettha vipassanāya pādakabhūtā adhippetā, na yā kācīti sakalassāpi adhicittānuyogassa jotitabhāvo veditabbo.
「示诸天」的注释。显示巴利原文
Devatārocanavaṇṇanā
91 「至此为止」即以这些经句为限。其中,通过这样的……讲述,显示了善通达的状态,应如此连接。ca字表简别之义,以此将现在要说的意思排除在外。「Ekamidaṃ」即是「一时,我」。「idaṃ」仅为一个不变化词。以「ādi」一词包含了「诸比丘,时」等文句。此处词句的连接为:「诸比丘,一时,我……」。显示巴利原文
91.Ettāvatāti ettakena suttapadesena. Tatthāpi ca iminā…pe… kathanena suppaṭividdhabhāvaṃ pakāsetvāti yojanā. Ca-saddo byatirekattho, tena idāni vuccamānatthaṃ ullaṅgeti. Ekamidāhanti ekaṃ ahaṃ. Idaṃ-saddo nipātamattaṃ. Ādi-saddena ‘‘bhikkhave samaya’’nti evamādi pāṭho saṅgahito. Ahaṃ bhikkhave ekaṃ samayanti evaṃ pettha padayojanā.
「Subhagavana(幸运林)」:因自身具足美好吉祥,故称「幸运」,意为拥有美好的祥瑞或美好的欲乐。因为彼处由于吉祥成就而美好,人们于其中希求美好的欲乐;又因受大众喜爱,故称「幸运」。「Vanayatīti vanaṃ」:林(vana)意为「令人生起爱着」,即以自身成就使有情对自己生起爱着;或谓林意为「它乞求」,仿佛以其成就向有情乞求说:「请来享用我」。既是幸运,又是林,故为「幸运林」,即在此幸运林中。然而,在注疏中何必如此详细铺陈?直接说「在名为如此之林中」即可。固然,婆罗树亦可称为「sāla」,任何树乃至林中最年长的林王树,皆可如此称呼。但此处专指林王树,故特别指出「在林王树下」。「以根除的方式」,即是以断除随眠的方式。显示巴利原文
Subhagavaneti subhagattā subhagaṃ, sundarasirikattā , sundarakāmattā vāti attho. Subhagañhi taṃ sirisampattiyā, sundare cettha kāme manussā patthenti. Bahujanakantatāyapi taṃ subhagaṃ. Vanayatīti vanaṃ, attasampattiyā attani sinehaṃ uppādetīti attho. Vanute iti vā vanaṃ, attasampattiyā eva ‘‘maṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti satte yācati viyāti attho. Subhagañca taṃ vanañcāti subhagavanaṃ, tasmiṃ subhagavane.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana kiṃ iminā papañcenāti ‘‘evaṃ nāmake vane’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāmaṃ sālarukkhopi ‘‘sālo’’ti vuccati, yo koci rukkhopi vanappati jeṭṭhakarukkhopi. Idha pana pacchimo eva adhippetoti āha ‘‘vanappatijeṭṭhakassa mūle’’ti. Mūlasamugghātavasenāti anusayasamucchindanavasena.
「不离开」:由于不动的法性,故不抛弃、不舍弃。「不热恼任何有情,所以叫无热」——这是随顺该处名称的惯常用法而说的,否则,一切净居天皆不热恼任何有情,便都可称为无热了。「不离开」等词源的解释,其道理也是如此。「美好所见」:即可爱、可观看,这是其义,故说「美貌」等。他们所见是美好的,意谓他们以眼和识所见的,都是美妙、美好的。所有这些天众,在五蕴有中最为殊胜,因为于此之上,再无更加超胜者。显示巴利原文
Na vihāyantīti akuppadhammatāya na vijahanti. ‘‘Na kañci sattaṃ tapantīti atappā’’ti idaṃ tesu tassā samaññāya niruḷhatāya vuttaṃ, aññathā sabbepi suddhāvāsā na kañci sattaṃ tapantīti atappā nāma siyuṃ. ‘‘Na vihāyantī’’tiādinibbacanesupi eseva nayo. Sundaradassanāti dassanīyāti ayamatthoti āha ‘‘abhirūpā’’tiādi. Sundarametesaṃ dassananti sobhanametesaṃ cakkhunā dassanaṃ, viññāṇena dassanaṃ pīti attho. Sabbe heva…pe… jeṭṭhā pañcavokārabhave tato visiṭṭhānaṃ abhāvato.
「依七位佛陀」:即依七位正自觉者的本行。因是由一位无热梵天所祈请而说,故说为由全体无热天所说,因此言「同样,由无热天」。对其余诸天,道理亦同。故世尊说:「众多天神这样对我说。」然而,经中所说「数百位天神」等,乃是后来那些天神在自己的教法中证得殊胜、往生彼处之后所说。此处有两种连结:法界句的连结,与告示天神句的连结。「归结」即总结。其中,凡未在义理上详加分释之处,皆易于理解。显示巴利原文
Sattannaṃ buddhānaṃ vasenāti sattannaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ apadānavasena. Avihehi ajjhiṭṭhena ekena avihābrahmunā kathitā tehi sabbehi kathitā nāma hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘tathā avihehī’’ti. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘devatā maṃ etadavocu’’nti. Yaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘anekāni devatāsatānī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ pacchā attano sāsane visesaṃ adhigantvā tattha uppannānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Anusandhidvayampīti dhammadhātupadānusandhi, devatārocanapadānusandhīti duvidhaṃ anusandhiṃ. Niyyātentoti nigamento. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyamevāti.